Home

2014 Chrysler 200 Sedan Owner`s Manual

1. Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Use only ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Failure to use ATF 4 fluid may affect the Transmission function or performance of your transmission We recommend MOPAR ATF 4 fluid Brake Master We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3 and SAE J1703 If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available Cylinder then DOT 4 is acceptable Power Steer We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic ing Reservoir Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS B MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 476 Maintenance Chart llle sss M A N T E N A N e I S e H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N ie E S ie H E D U L E S 8 476 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change indicator system The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Based on engine operation conditions the oil change indicator message will illuminate This means that ser vice is required for your vehicle Operating conditions such as frequent short trips trailer tow extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures and E85 fuel usage will influence when the Oil Change Required message is displayed Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change
2. 180 Programming A Non Rolling Code 182 Canadian Gate Operator Programming 183 Using HomeLink S CUTIL ras aes deba RR pt mdr E Ree 185 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Troubleshooting Tips 0 000 185 MH ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS 190 General Information 00 186 Bl CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF EQUIPPED eaae ities Rb sich ep REM 194 ll POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED 187 Qu B CUPHOLDERS egre nt 194 Opening Sunroof Express 188 Front Seat Cupholders 0 194 Opening Sunroof Manual Mode 188 Rear Cupholders 00000 194 Closing Sunroof Express 188 B SIORAGE v mee oS ae baw 8 196 Closing Sunroof Manual Mode 189 Glove Compartment 0 0 196 Pinch Protect Feature 0 000 189 B CONSOLE FEATURES serene 196 Venting Sunroof Express 189 Stota gE ie Eger ador ber bead dhe ae x 196 Sunshade Operation 00 189 ME CARGO AREA FEATURES 198 Wind Buffeting 0 0 0 0000 190 Ski Pass Through ssi 6 xo des a Rees 200 Sunroof Maintenance 0004 190 E REAR WINDOW FEATURES 200 Ignition Off Opera
3. To access the battery turn the steering wheel fully to the right and remove the inner fender shield Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom mended 430 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can e It is essential when replacing the cables on the burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid battery that the positive cable is attached to the to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean positive post and the negative cable is attached to over a battery when attaching clamps If acid the negative post Battery posts are marked positive splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme and negative and are identified on the diately with large amounts of water e Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 Volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other e Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands Air Conditioner Maintenance after handling For best possible performance your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer at the start
4. Next Channel to select the next channel Previous Channel to select the previous channel List Channel to hear a list of available channels Select Name to say the name of a channel Menu Radio to switch to the radio menu Main Menu to switch to the main menu Disc Mode To switch to the disc mode say Disc In this mode you may say the following commands e e Track to change the track Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Main Menu to switch to the main menu USB Mode To switch to USB mode say USB In this mode you may say the following commands Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track Play to play an Artist Name Playlist Name Album Name Track Name etc Bluetooth Streaming BT Mode To switch to Bluetooth Streaming BT mode say Bluetooth Streaming In this mode you may say the following commands e Next Track to play the next track Previous Track to play the previous track e List to list an Artist Playlist Album Track etc ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 Memo Mode Previous to play the previous memo To switch to the voice recorder mode say Memo In Delete to delete a memo this mode you may say the following commands Delete All
5. 232 Control Buttons 223 Tie o oa esee Sex gi cele Oe iras Pod s Du Se 232 ll ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION Elapsed Time 0 0 0 00 cee 233 CED ET BENE a tore guqgamict te a EVIC Units Selection UNITS IN Display 233 ey Mon MM EE EVIS 226 System Status csse eee ee 233 Oil Change Required If Equipped 227 O Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features 04 aaa E Rec ED RU RR eR ne 233 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME E SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK 236 E Uconnect amp 730N 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV IF EQUIPPED 0 237 Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped 237 Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone lt Equipped ses baie pao eae eae es 237 B Uconnect 130 auauua ERR R3 237 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 237 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play 00 0 241 Notes On Playing MP3 Files 243 Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode 246 Bl Uconnect amp 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO 247 Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files LIST Button CD Mode For MP3 Play INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped i
6. FM 101 1 10 040335767 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 1 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading below the red mark of the gauge shows that the engine cooling system is operating properly The gauge pointer may show a higher than normal tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades in heavy stop and go traffic or when towing a trailer If the pointer rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark turn the engine off immediately and call for service There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioning is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the Temperature control to maximum heat the Mode control to Floor and the Fan control to High This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system 2 Fuel Door Reminder E 3 Fuel Gauge This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the vehicle When the ignition switch is in the ON RUN position the pointer wil
7. 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position 228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this procedure EVIC Main Menu To step to each main menu feature press and release the MENU button once for each step A step from the last item in the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be displayed The following features are in the Main menu e Compass Outside Temperature e Audio Information if radio is on display e Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty e Tire Pressure Status display Elapsed Time e EVIC Units Selection e System Status Personal Settings NOTE For features in the EVIC that can be reset Aver age Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time the EVIC prompts a reset with a SELECT button graphic and the word RESET next to it When the SELECT button is pressed the selected feature will reset and RESET ALL will display next to the SELECT button graphic Pressing SELECT a second time will reset both Average Fuel Economy and Elapsed Time After three seconds without pressing SELECT RESET ALL will return to RESET and only the selected feature will have been reset Compass Display COMPASS Button The compass heading indicates the direction A the vehicle is facing Press an
8. 390 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Recreational Towing All Models CAUTION Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front wheels are OFF the ground This may be accomplished usinga DO NOT flat tow this vehicle Damage to the tow dolly or vehicle trailer If using a tow dolly follow drivetrain will result this procedure Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re quirements can cause severe transmission damage 1 Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle following Damage from improper towing is not covered un the dolly manufacturer s instructions der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty 2 Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly 3 Firmly apply the parking brake Place the transmis sion in PARK 4 Properly secure the front wheels to the dolly following the dolly manufacturer s instructions 5 Release the parking brake WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS ll HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 392 B IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS 22 392 Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped isis RR s 393 E WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS o iu as eka hera RR ees 394 Torque Specifications sess 394 E JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING 395 Jack Locations a enon ec rd a 396 Spare Tire Stowage 0 000000 396 Preparations For Jacking Jacking Instructions Road Tire Installation 0 JUMP ST
9. Dimmer Switch Headlight 165 INDEX 497 Dipsticks Automatic Transmission 447 OU ENGINE 4 ox b eta RE eR eed 425 Power Steering s 33s ag ene and ET es ae a 319 Disabled Vehicle Towing llle 414 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 442 Door LOCKS zz cs we dad ES A ea 31 Door Locks Automatic 0 0 0 0 000000 aa 33 Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Waters sca entem ea te e RR E Y nr es 317 E 85 Fuel be ae y ROS RR XU RO 368 Electrical Power Outlets 0005 190 Electric Rear Window Defrost lus 200 Electric Remote Mirrors 00000 ee 107 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 174 Electronic Stability Control ESC 498 INDEX ae Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 224 Emergency In Case of Jacking 24er RI RR RR pn 395 Jump Starting saccos kg ete ai d 407 TOWING s recien abre HES S ed dd 414 Emergency Trunk Release 06 41 Emission Control System Maintenance 422 PRPC ss iso br ai Bice nh ag te tate ae adele det s 419 Air Cleaner 2er ie ae cain ER ee ing 428 Block Heater 1 0 cee eee eee 295 Break In Recommendations 94 Checking Oil Level 1 2 0 0 0 0 00000 425 Compartment vrs as euna eee 420 Compartment Identification 420 Coolant Antifreeze llle 438 COONS 20 a oseremeas deena
10. Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner This will remove accumula tions of salt or road film Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc NOTE Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend ing on geographical area and frequency of use Poor performance of blades may be present with chattering marks water lines or wet spots If any of these conditions are present clean the wiper blades or replace as neces sary Adding Washer Fluid The windshield washer and the rear window washer share the same fluid reservoir The fluid reservoir is located in the engine compartment Be sure to check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals Fill the ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 435 reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water When refilling the washer fluid reservoir apply some washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper blades clean
11. Mix D Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost GV Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the Air Conditioning A C button is not pressed This dehu midifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary e Recirculation Control JR Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside condi tions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277 The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp Automatic Temperature Control ATC If weather will cause windows to fog on the inside Equipped because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle Select th
12. Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Ls Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Event Data Recorder EDR Child Restraints 24 cem aed eee xS Transporting Pets 0 0 000 eee E ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS E SAFETY UWS es eda RE EY ded ee eas Op Transporting Passengers Exhaust GaSe 2 224 S00 008904 54 22024 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 65 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place You can insert the double sided keys into the locks with either side up 0202011739 Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 NOTE e If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tempo rarily in the ignition switch lock cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as described If a malfunction occurs the
13. Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers 240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade AM FM Button Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 to 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within fiv
14. The head restraints should only be removed by quali 022607494 fied technicians for service purposes only If either of the head restraints require removal see your autho rized dealer Active Head Restraint Normal Position e In the event of deployment of an Active Head Re straint refer to Occupant Restraints Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information WARNING Do not place items over the top of the Active Head Restraint such as coats seat covers or portable DVD players These items may interfere with the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157 WARNING Continued e Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are struck by an object such as a hand foot or loose cargo To avoid accidental deployment of the Ac tive Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Re straint during sudden stops Failure to follow this warning could cause personal injury if the Active Head Restraint is deployed operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death Head Restraints Rear Seats The rear seat head restraints are fixed and cannot be adjusted For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to Occupant Restraints in Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information Continue
15. Three point lap and shoulder belts for all seating positions 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e e Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen ger Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR located on top of the front seats integrated into the head restraint if equipped Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC for the driver and passengers seated next to a window Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB An energy absorbing steering column and steering wheel Knee bolsters blockers for front seat occupants Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may enhance occupant protection by managing occupant energy during an impact event All seat belt systems except the driver s include Automatic Locking Retractors ALRs which lock the seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in a seat Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible If you will be carrying children too small for adult sized seat belts the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren LATCH feature also can be used to hold infant and child restraint systems For more information on LATCH refer to Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
16. You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to function automatically Selecting the O OFF position on the blower control stops the system completely and closes the outside air intake The recommended setting for maximum comfort is 72 F 22 C for the average person however this may vary en UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279 NOTE e The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime without affecting automatic operation Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button to flash three times and then turn off This indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from the front of the radiator and through the condenser Manual Operation This system offers a full complement of manual override features which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic or Blower and Mode Pre ferred Automatic This means the operator can override the blower the mode or both There is a manual blower range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by rotating the Blower Control knob on the left NOTE Please read the A
17. here are some of the most common solutions Replace the battery in the original hand held transmit ter e Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for programming and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance 186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se WARNING WARNING Continued use a garage door opener without these safety fea tures Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for safety information or assistance Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a danger ous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death WARNING This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Your motorized door or gate will open and close Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following while you are programming the universal trans two conditions ceiver Do not program the transceiver if people pets General Information 1 This device may not cause harmful interference or other objects are in the path of the door or gate Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener 2 This device must accept any interference that may be that has a stop and reverse feature as
18. llle 428 Oil Pressure Light cssc ns llle 210 Onboard Diagnostic System llus 421 Operating Precautions llle 421 Operator Manual Owner s Manual 4 Overheating Engine ceu iasi erek npa nena i 392 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 Paint Cate iios o e eee 450 Panic Alarmes i bes vato mne OTI E nra 26 Parking Brake cio nee 4 a eae eR e acea 320 Passing Might cise s opt peter Ea etes 166 Personal Settings iae iix OR ee Rees 233 l TTE 94 Phone Cellular llle 110 Phone Hands Free Uconnect 110 Placard Tire and Loading Information 338 Power Deck Lid Release llle 40 Door Locks ersari zesw Rond ks chew ed oa es 32 Mirrors 42a dehors Ge a hh Ue Be PEA X Ea 107 Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 190 Seats ida bark dede uaderge90x Ro es 147 rcg pq PERMOTI 319 SuntOOE a vici REED E EN eh Ae uw 187 Windows lees 36 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 58 Preparation for Jacking llle 397 Pretensioners Seat DELS 3 e d Een ae dee Reg uae p aC 53 506 INDEX eee Programmable Electronic Features 233 Radial Ply Tires oos ke Rp 0744821994446 345 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 441 Radio Operation i ox cepere bare s 272 Radio Remote Controls 0000000 270 Rear Cuphold t iios hae Ree ERR URS 195 Rear Seat Folding 1 0 0 cee eee 159 Rearview Mi
19. 1 Start the engine Leave the shift lever in PARK in order to enter the EVIC Programming Menus 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC 3 Press and release the DOWN button until Calibrate Compass Yes displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button and the CAL indicator will start flashing 5 Drive the vehicle slowly under 5 mph 8 km h com pleting one or more circles in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To compensate for the differ ences the variance should be set for the zone where the vehicle is driven per the zone map Once properly set the compass will automatically compensate for the differences and provide the most accurate compass heading NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones iPod s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may interfere and cause false compass readings UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231 3 Press and release the DOWN button until Compass Variance and the current Variance Value displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the SELECT button to increment the Variance Valu
20. 5 Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting NOTE that affects radio wave signals Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors The EVIC will also display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds when a system fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is detected In this case the CHECK TPM SYSTEM mes sage is then followed with a graphic display with pres sure values still shown This indicates that the pressure values are still being received from the TPM sensors but they may not be located in the correct vehicle position The system still needs to be serviced as long as the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message is displayed 1 The compact spare tire if so equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will remain ON a chime will sound and the EVIC will still display a flashing pressure value and the Inflate to XX mes sage in the graphic display After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seco
21. Power Mirror Control To adjust a mirror turn the control wand toward the left or right mirror positions indicated Tilt the control wand in the direction you want the mirror to move 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE SS Adjusting Side View Mirrors Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror Outside Mirror Passenger Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle 030437628 Mirror Directions WARNING When you are finished adjusting the mirror turn the control to the center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side convex mirror could cause you to Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 WARNING Continued Heated Mirrors If Equipped collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice This feature can be activated whenever you turn on the rear window defroster if equipped Refer to Rear Window Features in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for further information
22. Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next channel in Satellite mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new channel until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass channels without stop ping until you release it SCAN Button Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next channel pausing for eight seconds before con tinuing to the next To stop the search press the SCAN button a second time INFO Button Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa tion between Artist Song Title and Composer if avail able Also pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title all of the time press and hold again to return to normal display RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the direction of the arrows 262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se TUNE Control Rotary Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the m
23. master cylinder power steering and transmission e Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as four speed only and fill as needed required Check function of all interior and exterior lights Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped with dipstick e Inspect brake pads shoes rotors drums hoses Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following and park brake page for the required maintenance intervals Required Maintenance Intervals e Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System M A l N T E N A N e E S e H E D U L E S 8 e Inspect exhaust system e Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or Ch il and filter eee off road conditions 478 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A A W Maintenance Chart N T Mileage or time passed o o o o o o o o S 2 2 E whichever comes first S S S S S S S S8 S S S S S S A amp 88s s8g882788 8s8 9 2 8 98 29 A y r r y r T Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 E Or Kilometers S 8 8 8 S 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 7 5 a 7 i ceo 4 e e ceo e S J S S 88 S 8 3 8 5 9 R SX Cc YE Additional Inspections E Inspect the CV joints X X X X X T Inspect front suspension tie rod E ends boot seals and replace if X X X X X X X a necessary S e Inspect the brake li
24. present instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat operate power windows other controls or move y belts the vehicle WARNING Automatic Transmission When leaving the vehicle always remove the key The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes ram e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with before shifting into any driving gear access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Continued 292 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal Normal Starting NOTE Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal For Vehicles Not Equipped With Tip Start Four Spee
25. sees 36 Power Window Switches 36 Auto Window Down If Equipped 37 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME Auto Window Up With Anti Pinch Protection If Equipped 38 Window Lockout Switch liess 39 Wind B lfte ng ee xeEREER Y EU 39 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE i4 hh 40 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING iier ren 41 Trunk Internal Emergency Release 41 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS 43s d ded 41 Lap Shoulder Belts 00004 45 Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure 50 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage 50 Rear Seat Belts iuis erede ete e aaa wet 51 Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions 51 Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR It Equipped a La sec carne as haa es 52 Energy Management Feature 53 Seat Belt Pretensioners Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR 53 Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System BeltAlertB 2 vibe nme x ace eere S es 57 Seat Belts And Pregnant Women 58 Seat Belt Extender llle 58 Supplemental Restraint System SRS Alr Bags aue ga gals eas aia ae ale s 59 Air Bag System Components 60 Advanced Front Air Bag Features 61 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
26. your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is Your vehicle could move and injure you and others firmly pressing the brake pedal if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake Continued pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 309 WARNING Continued e Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement Continued WARNING Continued When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni tion key and lock your vehicle Never leave chil dren alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattend
27. All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle 380 STARTING AND OPERAT NG x Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain Engine Transmission Max Frontal Area Mak E e HEC Man reris s SM 2 4L Auto 11 sq ft 1 0 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg See Note 2 3 6L Auto 22 sq ft 2 0 sq m 1 000 Ibs 450 kg 100 Ibs 45 kg Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Note 1 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as Note 2 Enclosed trailers or open utility trailers with part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo front shields guards are not recommended for use with and it should never exceed the weight referenced on the all four cylinder engines with automatic transmission Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to Tire Please see your authorized dealer for additional infor Safety Information in Starting and Operating for mation further information Trailer And Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to lo
28. Available With Auto Headlights Only When ON is selected and the headlight switch is in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on approxi mately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature To make your selection press the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears NOTE Turning the headlights on during the daytime causes the instrument panel lights to dim To increase the brightness refer to Lights in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Key Off Power Delay When this feature is selected the power window switches radio Uconnect phone if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front vehicle door will cancel this feature To make your selection press the SELECT button until Off 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears 236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Illumin Approach When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the remote keyless entry transmitter To make your selection press the SELECT button until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears Display Units In The EVIC and odometer can be changed between English and Metric units of measure To make your selection press and release the SELECT butt
29. If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect Phone The status is given for network signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone keypad and still use the Uconnect Phone while dialing via the mobile phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth mobile phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The Uconnect Phone will work the same as if you dial the number using Voice Command NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the Uconnect Phone to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situa tion after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once your call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute ON OFF When you mute the Uconnect Phone you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you To mute the Uconnect Phone e P
30. Immobilizer 0 15 Knee Bolster iaer aeta iania a harea oE pa 59 Lane Change and Turn Signals 216 Lane Change Assist orce dss krani amia bma sss 165 Lap Shoulder Belse s qiere casa urea eae ea 45 EatcheS re ck a E EE E RINT E dE 99 THOOG 4 eea ana Sek eck E PE EEE OED ee 160 Lead Free Gasoline llle 364 Leaks Fluido 2 uve i Edu ERA X ATE 99 Lifeof TmeS 2c Ok priii e 351 Light Bulbs ii sche RR Rer Reb 99 Light S 2 4 ree REI DE ERG ceed 99 ANDAR eese E IR RR RS Ce e sata ced 66 Back Up i 636404 e eme Re ea 468 Battery SaVer sess a E REOR REESE RR 169 Brake Assist Warning 000 330 Brake Warning ex see em eder ms 211 Bulb Replacement 4 cs a0 Rr eme 464 Daytime Running en INDEX 503 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator 330 Engine Temperature Warning 210 EXTENT cits eo rue err nr er PER E Pad 99 FOS oa Sh dca Roi RO avy Rc eda 166 Headlights o ene te SE aaa 163 Headlights On With Wipers 164 Headlight Switch s ities esee ees 163 High Beam Indicator lille 222 Illuminated Entry 0 00000000 21 Instrument Cluster 0 2 0 0 aoaeiaa 163 MENOT 84 dedu so Pr Sek ta o RE E 168 License Soo oh Gentle ap eRe a eee eas d 470 Lights On Reminder llle 164 Low Fuel 1525909 dee eger edere 209 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine 220 Map Reading llle 168 Suus
31. In this way the air bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB Inflator Units The Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side air bags to inflate based on the severity and type of collision Based on the severity and type of collision the side air bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be triggered releasing a large quantity of non toxic gas The inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door The SAB fully inflates in about 10 milliseconds The side air bag moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates This especially applies to children Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC Inflator Units During collisions where the impact is confined to a particular area of the side of the vehicle the ORC may deploy the SABIC air bags depending on the severity and type of collision In these events the ORC will deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle A quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the side curtain air bag The inflating side curtain air bag pushes the outside edge of th
32. LATCH NOTE The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation based on several factors including the severity and type of collision ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag 1 Children 12 years old and under should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing child restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat belt properly see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt posi tioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm If a child from 2 to 12 years old not in a rear facing child seat must ride in the front passenger seat move the seat as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint Refer to Child Restraints You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make s
33. Mo CN o ge NL LOT 49 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps O4 315 057003765 STARTING AND OPERATING 387 Towing Tips Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing up the trailer in an area located away from heavy traffic Automatic Transmission The DRIVE range can be selected when towing How ever if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE select the 3 range with four speed transmission or select a lower gear using the AutoStick shift control with six speed transmission NOTE Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking 388 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses If you REGULARLY TOW a trailer for more than 45 minutes of continuous operation then change the auto matic transmission fluid and filter as specified for po lice taxi fleet or frequent trailer towing Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals NOTE Check the transmission fluid level four speed transmission only before towing The six speed transmis sion does not require a fluid level check before towing If however you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc tion see your auth
34. Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly a collision Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You would not have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the brake system warning light indicates system failure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445 Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may WARNING cause leaking in the system e Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Using the wrong type of brake fluid Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed can severely damage your brake system and or Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re impair its performance The proper type of brake fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Ma
35. This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant s chest Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices may improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occu pants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC Like the air bags the preten sioners are single use items A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately Supplemental Active Head Restraints AHR These head restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec tion of the head restraint The head restraint will be split in two halves with the front half being soft foam and trim the back half being decorative plastic 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE How The Active Head Restraints AHR Work The Occupant Re
36. You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision Tongue Weight TW The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the maximum width of the front of a trailer Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hitches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers EE STARTING AND OPERATING 379 Trailer Hitch Classification Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions The following chart provides the industry standard for Class Max Trailer Hitch the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can Industry Standards tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the Class I Light Duty 2 000 Ibs 907 kg correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Class II Medium Duty 3 500 Ibs 1 587 kg Class III Heavy Duty 5 000 Ibs 2 268 kg Class IV Extra Heavy 10 000 Ibs 4 540 kg Duty Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain
37. and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis play e Maximum number of characters in file folder names Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257 use a 44 1 kHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps cation quency
38. continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed km h Pressing the SET button once will result in a 2 km h decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 2 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to decrease until the button is released then the new set speed will be established To Accelerate For Passing Press the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the vehicle set speed NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control 178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se h WARNING The HomeLink buttons located on either the overt ead console headliner or sunvisor designate the three differ Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the ent HomeLink channels The HomeLink indicator is system cannot maintain a constant speed Your ve located above the center button hicle could go too fast for the conditions and you could lose control and have an accident Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
39. guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as possible Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and it will not shift during travel When trailering cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and have a collision When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not overload your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a loss of control poor performance or dam age to brakes axle engine transmission steering suspension chassis structure or tires Continued WARNING Continued e Safety chains must always be used between your vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer wheels e GCWR must not be exceeded Continued 384 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Total weight must be distributed between the tow Tires General Information in Starting And Oper vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ating
40. kHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported Playback Of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders 258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc LIST Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders on the disc Scrolling up or down the list is done by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob Selecting a folder by pressing the TUNE SCROLL control
41. see the next two sections for an alternate way to Select or Delete a paired phone Select Another Mobile Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the Uconnect Phone e Press the w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts e You can also press the button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 Uconnect Phone will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete Uconnect Phone Paired Mobile Phones e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts e You can also press the w button at any time while the list is being played and choose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect amp Phone Uconnect Phone Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the Xe button and say Uconnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uc
42. system in Partial Off mode before rocking the vehicle Refer to Electronic Brake Control in Starting And Operating for further infor mation Once the vehicle has been freed press the ESC Off switch again to restore ESC On mode en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 413 CAUTION WARNING Continued explode and injure someone Do not spin your vehi cle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for e When rocking a stuck vehicle by shifting be tween DRIVE and REVERSE do not spin the wheels faster than 15 mph 24 km h or drivetrain damage may result longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transmission overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE above 30 mph 48 km h while in gear no trans If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be mission shifting occurring moved out of the PARK position you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever m WARNING 1 Turn the engine OFF Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener 2 Firmly apply the parking brake ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage or even failure of the axle and tires A tire could 3 Remove the rubber cupholder liner Squeeze one side of the liner s center to expose its edge
43. wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire Do not install more than one compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any given time WARNING Compact spares are for temporary emergency use only With these spares do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Temporary use spares have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Full Size Spare If Equipped The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not This spare tire may have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use full size spare tire needs to be replaced Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency ram use only This tire is identified by a label located on the limited use spare wheel This label contains the driving limitations for this spare This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this
44. you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key Once the key is removed the transmission is locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un wanted movement Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 301 WARNING Continued CAUTION e When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni e Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you tion key and lock your vehicle Never leave chil must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF dren alone in vehicle or with access to an position to the ON RUN position and also press unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result e DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that or in a location accessible to children A child could you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi operate power windows other controls or move tion the vehicle e When shifting into PAR
45. 210 PASSING see esed ene ore e Re eie s 166 Seat Belt Reminder sss see i tenisas 209 security Alami ie aer etd tans ae ERR 19 SOLVICE V sepadia XI RES aa ae EUR drea ala dC dead 464 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 218 Traction Control 0 00 00 eee eee 330 Tum Signal iue mue ex cake bx Saal 99 VOlfage iaa xk ri aes ede BOs ob ale a aes 209 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 208 Loading Vehidee llle 375 Capacities usi eue Ste ete ed bebes 376 THOS as o SM Sad AbD Ses Rha gt ae Edd 337 og c dunn ao Phd cate te a ola ee ee boas 31 Automatic Door 0 000 eee 33 Auto Unlock sas esed ae ea SY Ce ee dert 33 Child Protection 00 0000 eee eee 34 DOOR rs teen beo EEG P Bay shee E E ES 31 Power Door 302 03 ee AA br R peRSR EST 32 Low Tire Pressure System 000 355 Lubrication Body sss zi ae rex emt 433 Lug N ts o d ede a aneia d eR dora ix de CR Ente 394 504 INDEX ees Lumbar Support esate sa hems xm he m e 153 Maintenance Free Battery 0000 429 Maintenance Procedures 00 000 ees 424 Maintenance Schedule 000000 e eee 476 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 220 Manual Service seig peenes taeraa a a a ees 490 Map Reading Lights 00 168 Master Cylinder Brakes 00 444 Meth nol 21 ee s b aoe ale e 365 Mini Trip Computer 00 0 000 222 1A
46. 400 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 341 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs 325 Ibs 465 Ibs 811a4d11 342 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Safety WARNING Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause collisions Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in over heating and tire failure increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION y imn M shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect ve hicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting in loss of vehicle control Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob e Safety lems You could lose control of your vehicle Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary areas are affected by improper tire pressure Economy Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 343 WARNING Continued Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left Always drive with ea
47. E button to turn recirculate off and adjust the temperature control for comfort Press the 7 amp 5 button to turn recirculate off If it s sunny set the Mode control at or near J and turn the air conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near 2 COOL OR COLD Press the G5 button to turn recirculate off HUMID CONDITIONS If it s sunny set the Mode control at or between 253 and J then turn the air 04 at s conditioning on If it s cloudy or dark set the Mode control at or near gt and turn 6 46 gly the air conditioning on If the windows begin to fog set Mode control at or between 33 and S COLD DRY Set the Mode control at or near If itis sunny you may want more upper air In CONDITIONS this case set the Mode control at or between J and 23 In very cold weather if you need extra heat at the windshield set the Mode control at or near the 3 CS 045606725 STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS Bl STARTING PROCEDURES 291 Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System 298 Automatic Transmission 291 Four Speed Automatic Transmission Normal Starting o ooo eiiis sess 292 REGU a Meus EE ance di iit inp Six Speed Automatic Transmission 62TE Exe EMT lf Equipped on ssec RR Below 20 F Or 29 C 00005 293
48. ER ERE 331 ll CUT 99 Aging Lite of Tires xac em eoe e een 351 Ait PreSsut6 iu sab Grea alk qr e doge ie he ben on 342 ClhiaMiS dux denm bake haw sah Rhea Gow 353 Changing sne a ducenda bra vepres ane als 395 Compact Spare s i2 s R3 ere ad e epu RE Ae oye 348 General Information 0 00000 342 High Speed ics ine tie ade eie Be heeds 344 Inflation Pressures 1 0 0 0 eee ees 343 Jacking 6 0 oce I d908 bo cdeweteadia es 395 Life Of Tires i223 md gor ce RR Sate ae eS eo 351 Load Capacity 2422s eet EE Eu 337 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 355 Pressure Warning Light 218 Quality Grading 00054 exec ERE 491 Radial arenarie 4 soe aah arte Cate es 345 Replacement s seda eR ieee ed aimes 352 Rotation X usi eR er RAS 354 Safety i ies rad e XA Era RR as 331 NZ OS peterem sdb aedi exui ara re eee 333 Snow Tires sssi emie 3b eg ie X3 Rehd RN d 346 Spare DT cu s scs sra guik ER orae P Se d ded a 396 Spinning Trailer Towing Tread Wear Indicators Tire Safety Information Tongue Towing 24 Hour Towing Assistance Disabled Vehicle Guid Recreational Weight Towing Towing Traction Trailer Towing Cooling System Tips Hitches Minimum Requirements Tips Weight Trailer Weight CS ons ane aca gus tata ae ee Een ed Bg Assistance 0 E na S Vehicle Behind a Motorhome 510 INDEX aa Trailer and Tongue Weight llus 381 VWITITIB ai doux ioa
49. File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the MP3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the MP3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rate ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245 MPEG Specifi Sampling Fre Bit Rate kbps ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist files are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported cation quency kHz MPEG 1 Audio 48 44 1 32 320 256 224 Layer 3 192 160 128 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 160 128 144 Layer 3 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 Playback Of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R m
50. Flat tire of identical size and service description Load Index and Speed Code Tire Types All Season Tires If Equipped All Season tires provide traction for all seasons spring summer fall and winter Traction levels may vary be tween different all season tires All season tires can be identified by the M S M amp S M S or MS designation on the tire sidewall Use all season tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Summer Or Three Season Tires If Equipped Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry conditions and are not intended to be driven in snow or on ice If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires be aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold driving conditions For more information contact a au thorized dealer Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall Use summer tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow Tires Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the winter Snow tires can be identified by a mountain snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall ee STARTING AND OPERATING 347 If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling
51. Maintenance 0 00000 eee 455 Seat Belt Reminder 0 0 0 0 00 cee les 57 Seat Bells nana mka au ee es 96 Adjustable Shoulder Belt 0 50 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 50 And Pregnant Women llle 58 Child Restraint 0 0 0 0 0 ee eae 73 Exterder 2 vage ko e begcer o kei eared 58 Front Seat i252 Rd netre SUR 45 Inspection euo adeb e us a hee e wes 96 Operating Instructions ss sarae ao e 46 PretenSlONers 22 2249 om bata ERE 3 e pn 53 Rear Seat es acca gio iss o xk RSS 45 Reminder lees 209 Untwisting Procedure 000 50 Seat Belts Sedan llle 41 Deals i3 4 9 eae Heh alee ETRE eae hee wee 146 Adjustment 4k sad Sok Sib baie Gre eel e S ets 146 Cleaning 34 4 i0bdidediieetigedtehiiss 160 Heated sus ew aces OR D UR we ew es 150 LunibarSupport 4 22 m e ees 153 PowWeb 4 te 6 och alate ne de pa E deabus BURG Y ders 147 Rear Folding 2 22229 RR 159 Reclining i e b nr RE 153 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 472 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 Sentry Key Programming 4 4 17 Service Assistance ees 485 Service Contacts ace oe sex RE WEGE X 487 Service Manuals llle 490 Settings Personal sse er ees 233 Setting the Clock icc se e ne 236 Shift Lever Override llle 413 Shoulder Belts eR Se 45 Side Airbag 508 INDEX eee Side Window Demisters De
52. Music Type mode for five seconds Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button or turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob within five seconds will allow the program format type to be se lected Many radio stations do not currently broadcast Music Type information Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following format types Program Type 16 Digit Character Display No program type or un None defined Adult Hits Adit Hit E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251 Program Type TO ial Program Type nup Classical Classicl Religious Talk Rel Talk Classic Rock Cls Rock Rock Rock College College Soft Soft Country Country Soft Rock Soft Rck Foreign Language Language Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Information Inform Sports Sports Jazz Jazz Talk Talk News News Top 40 Top 40 Nostalgia Nostalga Weather Weather Oldies Oldies By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon Personality Persnlty is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency Public Public station with the same selected Music Type name The Rhythm and Blues R amp B Music Type function only operates when in the FM Religious Music Rel Musc mode 252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows
53. Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1 800 521 9922 Canadian residents call 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French 488 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with the ownership experience You will be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
54. Port Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to the vehicle s iPod USB MP3 control system iPod or external USB device may take a few minutes to connect the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by pressing radio switches as described below NOTE If the audio device battery is completely dis charged it may not communicate with the iPod USB MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod USB MP3 control system may charge it to the required level Using This Feature By using an iPod cable or an external USB device to connect to the USB port The audio device can be played on the vehicle s sound system providing metadata artist track title album etc information on the radio display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265 e The audio device can be controlled using the radio buttons to Play Browse and List the iPod contents e The audio device battery charges when plugged into the USB AUX connector if supported by the specific audio device Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons To get into the iPod USB MP3 control mode and access a connected audio device either press the AUX button on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say USB or Switch to USB Once in the iPod USB MP3 control mode audio tracks if available from audio device start playing over the vehic
55. Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interference be tween the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems Chrysler Group LLC 14C41 126 AC CHRYSLER SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS AR Third Edition Printed in U S A
56. There are built in bottle holders located in both rear door 20 trim panels If containers of hot liquid are placed in the bottle holder they can spill when the door is closed burn ing the occupants Be careful when closing the doors to avoid injury 196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sa STORAGE CONSOLE FEATURES Glove Compartment Storage The glove compartment is located on the right side of th The center console is located between the front driver instrument panel To open the glove compartment pull and passenger seats The center console armrest slides outward on the latch handle located on the front of the forward from design position to provide added user glove compartment comfort The center console can be used for storage and is also equipped with an electrical power outlet Refer to Power Outlets in Understanding The Feature Of Your Vehicle for further information 035264516 Glove Compartment UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197 y Center Console Armrest Center Console Storage Two separate storage compartments are also located The top compartment holds small items such as a pen underneath the armrest and note pad while the larger bottom compartment will hold CDs and alike The bottom compartment also con tains a 12 Volt power outlet The console s front opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments 198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE BEEEEEEEEEREMARM
57. To Medium Vehicle Speed 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e e e e e Low Road Noise Smooth Road Surface Fully Closed Windows Dry Weather Conditions Operation From The Driver s Seat Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the Uconnect Phone Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Recent Calls If your phone supports Automatic Phonebook Down load Uconnect Phone can list your Outgoing Incom ing and Missed Calls Voice Text Reply Uconnect Phone can read or send new messages on your phone Read Messages If you receive a new text message while your phone is connected to Uconnect amp Phone an announcement will be made to notify you that you have a new text message If you wish to hear the new message 1 Press the button 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say SMS Read or Read Messages ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 3 Uconnect Phone will play the new text message for you After reading a message you can Reply or Forward the message using Uconnect Phone Send Messages You can send messages using Uconnect Phone To send a new message 1 Press the w button 2 After the Ready pro
58. Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 15 seconds After ten seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is com plete the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key is programmed The Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be pro grammed during this procedure Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your authorized dealer for details NOTE If a programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your
59. Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 Voice Tree Main Menu The 32 name language specific phonebook will be used The phones paired are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030772523 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Phonebook phonebook Enter Name Enter Name Entries Listed one 1st Confirmation at a time Enter Location 2nd Confirmation Entry Deleted Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Enter Number Phonebook Cleared New Entry Added Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Bic6bf80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Voice Tree Setup Setup Confirmation SMS Incoming Device Towing I em I E J 3 Announcement 7 n ex namie Select a anguage Eng ish Espanol Prompts peg T pin code Phones e to be deleted iici or Francais Enter Name of phone and follow prompts to complete pairing System System Lists All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 138 UNDER
60. a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call is in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the w button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the but ton Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the phone far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the button until you hear a single beep 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Redial e Press the w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The Uconnect amp Phone will call the last number that was dialed from your mobile phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect Phone Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle ignition has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types 1 After the ignition is switched to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery condition dictates cessation of the call on the Uconnect
61. adidas ang detegere eda 99 Flash To Pass isses Rn 166 Flexible Fuel Vehicles Cruising Range cx px RR ERR RSEN 371 Engine Oil cue ue ei eee rete 370 Fuel Requirements 0000000 368 Maintenance suas duse chen rcr eR Sab eee 371 Replacement Parts 3e area d ena 371 Martine DD m 371 Flooded Engine Starting 205 293 Fluid Capacities x oes Pan Ri oe epee etd 471 Fluid beaks saree raea bale e mE Ra ae PCR ER 99 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transmission 447 Brake wo oN aeae n thee RUE ER GE RE 444 Cooling System sire llle ees 438 Engine OW s censes dene ER ows domed 425 Power Steering eee 319 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 472 Fog Lights asses ee m as mas 166 Fog Light Service i sss tee ee 468 Folding Rear 5eat llle 159 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle sess seou derye sranie 412 Pe lees gua eet Be chee eee ek ee alate ae ee eb as 364 500 INDEX eee AG GUIVES sine i reine aite a i ate dic eodd d et 366 Clean Alf erari ce drauf a eoa RO ER Rorate 364 Ethanol odd Ga Soh bud RUE 365 Filler Cap Gas Cap lt sms ts matauia sase Eau 208 Filler Door Gas Cap cessisset eR 208 GIONE oeae a dee E E dewey ERE E A 364 GAUPE PC 208 Lighti ssiies 9 Rc e eme d 209 Materials Added llle 366 Methanol i152 c ena Ode Rs 365 Octane Rating 364 Requirements lees 364 Tank Capacity 6 eee 471 Fuel Flexible 2 ee ee 368 Fu
62. aee tos 342 Tire Inflation Pressures 00 343 Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation 344 Radial Ply Tires ssn gases eee 345 Tite Vy Pes uoo ties aes ete a ta 346 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 Run Flat Tires If Equipped 347 Spare Tires If Equipped 348 Tire SPINNE any hae aN haa Re ee 350 Tread Wear Indicators 350 Life Of Tite 142222 piht iaaii Paea 351 Replacement Tires ssepe keai cega ee s 352 E TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES 353 E TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS 354 ll TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS 355 Base System iu accedi np ee Ra Re eaa ce 357 Premium System If Equipped 360 General Information 0 363 E FUEL REQUIREMENTS 0 364 Reformulated Gasoline 0 364 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends 365 E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles 365 MMT In Gasoline 0 0 000005 366 Materials Added To Fuel 366 Fuel System Cautions 0 366 Carbon Monoxide Warnings E FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY TF EQUIPPED gt ierat esana KSEE ERENER 368 E 85 General Information 368 Ethanol Fuel E 85 llli 369 Fuel Requirements sses asand eiaa ass 369 Selection Of Engin
63. and spare tires Loading The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWKRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section ee STARTING AND OPERATING 339 To determine the maximum loading conditions of your 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX Ibs or XXX kg on your vehicle s placard Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX Ibs or XXX kg cargo a
64. and facilitate Continued removal 414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M 4 Turn the ignition to the ACC or ON RUN position 7 Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position DEED mol statt SIS GUBINS 8 The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL 5 Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal 9 Reinstall the cupholder liner 6 Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access hole at the front of the cupholder and push and hold the override release lever forward TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground All Models Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Rear Transmission in NEUTRAL e 25 mph 40 km h max speed e 15 mi 24 km max distance Front OK Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415 Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose following equip ment manufacturer s instructions Use of safety chains is mandatory Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle not to bumpers or associated brackets State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed If you must use the accessories wipers defrosters etc while being towed the ignition must be in the ON RUN po
65. at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285 Outside Air Intake Make sure the air intake located directly in front of the windshield is free of obstructions such as leaves Leaves collected in the air intake may reduce airflow and if they enter the plenum they could plug the water drains In winter months make sure the air intake is clear of ice slush and snow A C Air Filter If Equipped The A C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering the cabin The filter acts on air coming from outside the vehicle and recirculated air within the pas senger compartment Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for A C Air Filter service information or see your authorized dealer for service Refer to Maintenance Schedules for filter service inter vals 286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS HOT WEATHER Open the windows start the vehicle press the button to turn recirculate off AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS Set the Fan control to the high position full clockwise Press the A C button VERY HOT Set the Mode control at or between 7 and 2 Set the temperature control t to full cool After the hot air is pushed from the vehicle press the lt 5 button to turn recirculate on and roll up the windows Once you are comfortable press the
66. button and scroll using the TUNE SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is selected Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob and the Sirius ID number will display The Sirius ID number display will time out in two minutes Press any button on the radio to exit this screen Selecting Uconnect Satellite Mode Press the SAT button until SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible within the loading design of the rack Do not place items directly on or above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261 e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage Operating Instructions Uconnect Satellite Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN or ACC position to operate the radio SEEK Buttons
67. center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back WARNING Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back In a crash the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly which may result in serious injury or death A child must always wear both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints Combined Use any attachment method shown with an X Below Child Restraint 65 Ibs 29 5 kg LATCH Weight of the LATCH R T estraint Type Child Child Lower Anchors Seat Belt Only Lower Anchors Seat Belt Hep Restraint Onl Top Tether Tether Anchor nly Anchor Rear Facing Up to 65 lbs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Rear Facing More than X Child Restraint 65 lbs 29 5 kg Forward Facing Up to 65 Ibs X X Child Restraint 29 5 kg Forward Facing More than X 80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children LATCH Restraint System Anchor Tether We LATCH The next generation of child safety 022668173 Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren The LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH
68. collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buck led up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and or Seat Mounted Side Air Bag SAB during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor will lock only during very sudden stops or collisions This feature allows the shoul der part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions However in a collision the belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking the insi
69. commands This will become helpful once you start to learn the options NOTE At any time you can say the words Cancel Help or Main Menu These commands are universal and can be used from any menu All other commands can be used depending upon the active application When using this system you should speak clearly and at a normal speaking volume The system will best recognize your speech if the win dows are closed and the heater air conditioning fan is set to low Atany point if the system does not recognize one of your commands you will be prompted to repeat it 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se To hear the first available Menu press the Voice Com 3 Use the ON OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the mand vRbutton and say Help or Main Menu volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com mand system is speaking Please note the volume setting for Voice Command is different than the audio The Voice Command system understands two types of system commands Universal commands and Local commands Universal commands are available at all times Local commands are available if the supported radio mode is Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command active EVR button You may say Main Menu to switch to the main menu Commands Main Menu Changing The Volume In this mode you can say the following commands 1 Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command SVR b
70. condition WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455 Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft cloth Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use MOPAR Total Clean a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belt
71. display of certain radios Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook Transfer From Mobile Phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone Uconnect amp Phone automatically downloads names text names and number entries from your mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth amp Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See Uconnect website for supported phones e To call a name from the Uconnect amp Phonebook or downloaded Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the Bluetooth wireless phone connection is made to the Uconnect Phone for example after you start the vehicle A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the Uconnect Phone Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able the previously downloaded phonebook is avail able for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Either the mobile phone s phonebook or the mobile phone s SIM card phonebook is downloaded This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone These can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are trans ferred
72. do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the amp vRbutton and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer to Togeling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Place Retrieve A Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the e but ton until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the w button until you hear a single beep indicat ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at a time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the e button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the EVR button while a call is in progress and make
73. emitted by the system Programming Additional Transmitters Refer to Sentry Key Customer Key Programming If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter contact your authorized dealer for details Transmitter Battery Replacement The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 1 With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the seal battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it during removal with rubbing alcohol 3 To assemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions F Separating RKE Transmitter Halves e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received 021432709 including interference that may cause undesired op eration 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the e
74. formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to 244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss display the file name and folder name and will assign a number instead With a maximum number of files exceeding 20 folders will result in this display With 200 files exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis play e Maximum number of characters in file folder names Level 1 12 including a separator and a three character extension Level 2 31 including a separator and a three character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3
75. from the O OFF position 045607577 There are four blower speeds NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the blower control is left in the O Off position 045607574 Manual Temperature Control 274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Temperature Control 045607540 Rotate this control to regulate the tem perature of the air inside the passenger compartment Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer temperatures NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C condenser located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Air Conditioning Control T 045607557 temperatures Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is engaged Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while rotating right into the red area indicates warmer NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds e MAX AIC For m
76. intermittent wiper system when weather condi tions make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable Rotate the end of the wind shield wiper washer control lever to the first detent and then turn the end of the lever to select the desired delay interval There are five delay settings which allow you to UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171 regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle Windshield Washers every second to a maximum of approximately 18 seconds To use the washer pull the windshield wiper washer between cycles control lever toward you and hold it for as long as washer spray is desired If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the delay range the wipers will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume the intermittent interval previously selected If you activate the washer while the wiper control is in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles and then turn off 031508788 WARNING Changing Intermittent Settings Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield NOTE The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed could lead to a collision You might not see other If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph 16 km h Vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of delay times will be doubled Continued 172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued
77. is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi 186 kPa but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will still be ON In this situation the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system op eration or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS sensor to become inoperable After using an after market tire sealant it is recommended that you take your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your sensor function checked Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 357 CAUTION Continued e After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni toring Sensor NOTE e The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a
78. limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same as your original equipment tire replace or repair the original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity 350 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Limited use spares are for emergency use only In stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive more than the speed listed on the limit use spare wheel Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door Replace or repair the original equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels above 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping Refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h for more than 30 seconds continu ously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter w
79. noted that could affect the air bag system The diagnos tics also record the nature of the malfunction WARNING Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru ment panel could mean you won t have the air bags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned on stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad vanced Front Air Bags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of non toxic gas is generated to inflate the Advanced Front Air Bags Different air bag inflation rates are possible based on several factors including the collision type and severity The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to their full size The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The air bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the vent holes in the sides of the air bag
80. oil message to illuminate as early as 3 500 miles 5 600 km since last reset Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 500 miles 805 km Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator message after completing the scheduled oil change If a scheduled oil change is performed by someone other than your authorized dealer the message can be reset by referring to the steps described under Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Oil Change Required in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further in formation NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change inter vals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever comes first Severe Duty All Models Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles 6 500 km if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip Check engine oil level e Check windshield washer fluid level ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 477 e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil damage Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear Change Indicator System even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns e Rotate the tires Rotate at the first sign of irregu cee lar wear even if it occurs before the oil indicator e Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir brake system turns on
81. or assistance 180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Programming A Rolling Code For programming garage door openers that were manu factured after 1995 These garage door openers can be identified by the LEARN or TRAIN button located where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door opener It is NOT the button that is normally used to open and close the door The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer 0000 Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after Homelink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the LEARN or TRAINING button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener device motor Firmly press and release
82. phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority three and priority five phones are present in the vehicle the Uconnect Phone will use the priority three mobile phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority mobile phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section Dial By Saying A Number e Press the w button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Dial es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 e The system will prompt you to say the number you want to call For example you can say 151 1234 5555 The Uconnect Phone will confirm the phone number and then dial The number will appear in the display of certain radios Call By Saying A Name e Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ ously stored name entry in the Uconnect phonebook or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your Uconnect Phonebook The Uconnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the
83. previous menu Pair Link Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone To begin using your Uconnect Phone you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled mobile phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your mobile phone Owners Manual The Uconnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M The following are general phone to Uconnect Phone pairing instructions 1 Press the button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Device Pairing 3 When prompted after the beep say Pair a Device and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identifica tion Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your mobile phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the Uconnect Phone a name for your mobile phone Each mobile phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a priority level between one and seven with one being the highest priority You can pair up to seven mobile phones to your Uconnect Phone However at any given time only one mobile phone can be in use connected to your Uconnect System The priority allows the Uconnect Phone to know which mobile
84. products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION See the Warranty Information Booklet located on the DVD for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 489 MOPAR PARTS MOPAR fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They are recom mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washingion D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 1200 New Jersey Avenue SE West Building Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain
85. protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation Stone and gravel impact Insects tree sap and tar Salt in the air near seacoast localities Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451 Washing e e e e Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPARO Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Use a high quality cleaner wax such as MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch metal and painted surfaces Use of power washers exceeding 1 200 psi 8 274 kPa can result in damage or removal of paint and decals Special Care If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of Iv the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or s
86. retractor For additional information on ALR Restraints in this Vehicle refer to the Automatic Locking Mode description un der Occupant Restraints The cinching latch plate is designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a child restraint s belt path Please see the following table s and the following sections for more information about both types of seat belts 022669039 90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es What is the weight limit child s weight Weight limit of Always use the tether anchor when using weight of the child restraint for using the the Child Re the seat belt to install a forward facing child Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a straint restraint up to the recommended weight forward facing child restraint limit of the child restraint Can the rear facing child restraint touch the Yes Contact between the front passenger seat back of the front passenger seat and the child restraint is allowed if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact Can the head restraints be removed No Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten Yes In positions with cinching latch plates the seat belt against the belt path of the child CINCH the buckle stalk may be twisted restraint up to 3 full turns Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR re tractor ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE ST
87. returned to 0 mph 0 km h The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK 021836670 Power Door Lock Switch Automatic Door Locks If Equipped The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled When enabled the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle s speed exceeds 15 mph 24 km h The B 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Auto Unlock On Exit Programming The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be enabled or disabled as follows A For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure Close all doors and place the key in the ignition Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON RUN and then back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position Press the power door unlock switch to unlock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming 5 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock Sy
88. surface The drive wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid causing a collision or personal injury 316 STARTING AND OPERATING Se DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull erratically to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have a collision Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To reduce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep tires properly inflated 5 Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop ee STARTING AND OPERATING 317 DR
89. surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not completely in PARK Check by trying to move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal released Make sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving the vehicle Continued 300 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle As with all vehicles
90. system at the end If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi fluid temperature and it should be avoided when tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering possible Damage to the power steering pump may effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during Occur parking maneuvers NOTE Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel service interval is not required The fluid should only be travel are considered normal and do not indicate that checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are there is a problem with the power steering system apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer e Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steer ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering 320 STARTING AND OPERATING CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering system as the chemicals can damage your power steering components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurat
91. the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the SET RND button a second time to stop Ran dom Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restrictions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported 256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of folder levels 8 e Maximum number of files 255 Maximum number of folders The radio display of file names and folder names is limited For large numbers of files and or folders the radio may be unable to display the file name and folder name
92. them if you run your finger along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages Jj 022636667 ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85 Locating The LATCH Anchorages 4 In addition there are tether strap anchorages E behind each rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window They are found under a plastic cover with the tether anchorage symbol on it Tether Strap Anchorages LATCH compatible child restraint systems will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the anchorage Forward facing child restraints and some rear facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a 86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued tether strap The tether strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap after it is attached to the anchorage seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard positions Please refer to Installing The LATCH Center Seat LATCH Compatible Child Restraint System for typical in Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach Stallation instructions ments in the center seating position Only install this type of child restraint in the outboard seating positions Child restraints with flexible webbi
93. tire failure or condition The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte nance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitor ing Telltale Light Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire while adjusting your tire pressure Base System The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure 358 STARTING AND OPERATING Se monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper pressure The TPMS consists of the following components Receiver Module Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings l The Tire Pressur
94. tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized f
95. will turn on when you press the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE trans mitter or open any door This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Mirrors in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle for fur ther information The interior lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN from the OFF position NOTE e The front courtesy overhead console and door cour tesy lights will remain on if the dimmer control is in the Dome ON position extreme top position The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the dimmer control is in the Dome defeat position extreme bottom position 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE IF EQUIPPED This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors open the trunk or activate the Panic Alarm from distances approximately 66 ft 20 m using a Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The RKE transmitter does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system NOTE e The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects Inserting the key into the ignition switch disables all buttons on the RKE transmitter 0202011739 Vehicle Key To Unlock The Doors Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver s do
96. you to select between the following items e Set Clock Pressing the SELECT button will allow you to set the clock Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE SCROLL control knob After adjusting the hours press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL con trol knob Press the TUNE SCROLL control knob to save time change AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET RND button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253 Every time a preset button is used a corresponding butto
97. your vehicle monthly reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compactspare and to maintain the proper pressure the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warn Receiver Module ing limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to Three Trigger Modules mounted in three of the four receive this information wheel wells The TPMS consists of the following components Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Premium System If Equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings i The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires In addition the Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC will display a graphic showing the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible and inflate all
98. 0 Computer Trip Travel 000 0 21 Connector UI tice ona ENE tees Spel Dares anda 263 Universal Consumer Interface UCI 263 CONSOLE soi 85 Gok a ems eee End SERRE eds 160 Console FlOOf sieaa a iE VERTS 160 Contract S ryvice e so su rh ws Sx erg Re ers 487 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 441 Cooling System 6 0 0 ess 438 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 0 0 440 Coolant Capacity seeria senare eee 471 Coolant Level css sre RR RE 438 Disposal of Used Coolant lisse 442 Drain Flush and Refill Ls 438 Inspection 3 69303 coe cine ianed 3 ed 442 Points to Remember 0000 443 Pressure Cap 440s cse San weeds ai go eal 441 Radiator Cap sf i ace sandal sonent RR ey E 441 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 439 Corrosion Protection 0 0 00 0 0c ewes 450 Crankcase Ventilation Module 21 Cruise Diglit sa edu e mee duret gue Ga 215 Cupholdets is 22s e Gd e v 160 Customer Assistance 00 0 cee eee 485 Customer Programmable Features 233 Data Recorder Event llle 72 Daytime Running Lights 167 Dealer Service llle 423 Deck Lid Power Release 0008 40 Defroster Rear Window leeren 200 Defroster Windshield llle 97 Delay Intermittent Wipers lille 170 Diagnostic System Onboard 421
99. 0 90 cc a e REX BRE PESRTEGSECT IREGOEG i 105 Automatic Dimming lees 106 Electric Powered 0 0 00 cee ee eee 107 Heated isi 405 ea tenen une e hee aes 109 Outside 2 x6 seal db EAGYO Raids bus 108 R atvieW uu he e ac RE ERE RR UV 105 VANY cese 548 coe tebea ce UR RR Ren tes 109 Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Monitor Tire Pressure System 355 Mopat Parts s es bee OR Red 423 MTBE ETBE 4 65 634 06d ed ane de ed Pee db d 365 New Vehicle Break In Period iilis 94 Occupant Restraints s ccc esse ie ees d 65 Occupant Restraints Sedan 000 41 Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 364 Odometer i isses bed e ee a ees 212 lr Pr 212 Oil Change Indicator llle 214 Oil Change Indicator Reset 0 00 0 214 Oil Engine s is aint Be Eee epee eee 425 Capacity s edens Rene me Pm d eme ser eta A71 Change Interval 0 0 0 0 cee eee 214 Checking ss ranks ain yan EUR etm RR ee 425 Dips eiie kas arta d Cx eere E em ed 425 Disposal cae Beg Gare yal deb oaars Prep UE Sd 428 ee INDEX 505 Filter ia eG Sanne Samal remo aa ene d ace ed 428 Filter Disposal 2 cede narea Ret npe 428 Identification Logo llle 426 Materials Added to 0000005 428 Recommendation 0 000000 426 Synthelie ius Does ede eunt ene Rad 428 VISCOSHY 4282 i deed ue des ed hast e ied d 427 Oil Filter Selection
100. 12 years old or younger who have out grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat Vehicle Seat Belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle 76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Infants And Child Restraints Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear facing child safety seat Two types of child restraints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children from birth until they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years old Children should remain rearward facing until they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their convertible child seat WARNING e Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an air bag A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or younger including a child in a rearward facing infant seat Only use a rearward facing c
101. 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information 364 STARTING AND OPERATING Se FUEL REQUIREMENTS This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel 87 economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular gasoline having soodtabS an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recommended as it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to your engine However continued heavy spark knock at high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is required Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard starting stalling and hesitations If you experi ence these symptoms try another brand of gasoline before considering service for the vehicle Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifications the World wide Fuel Charter WWFC which define fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions performance and durability for your vehicle The manufacturer recom mendis the use of gasolines that meet the WWEC speci fications if they are available Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce ve
102. 4 STARTING AND OPERATING Se EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load LL Light load tire C D E E G Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire ee STARTING AND OPERATING 335 Tire Identification Number TIN the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the however the date code may only be on one side Tires with outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date tire c
103. ARMMAMAMMEE NN NOTE CARGO AREA FEATURES e A notch in the front of the console base allows for use The 60 40 split folding rear seat provides cargo carrying of a cellular phone while it is plugged into the power versatility The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling outlet with the armrest latched down nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters When the seats are folded down they provide a continuous The power outlet can also energize the cigar lighter in nearly flat extension of the load floor the optional cup holder ash receiver When the seatback is folded to the upright position make WARNING sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the seatback above the seat strap WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback in not securely locked into Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart ment lid in the open position Driving with the console compartment lid open may result in injury in a collision position the seat will not provide the proper sta bility for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199 WARNING Continued Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor Put heavier a z objects as low and as far forward as possible Place as e The cargo area m the rear of the vehicle with the much cargo as possible in front of the r
104. ARTING Preparations For Jump Start Jump Starting Procedure E FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE E SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ll TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Without The Ignition Key 3902 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher When the switch is activated all direc tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers This is an emergency warning system and it should not be used when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance the Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even though the ignition is placed in the OFF position NOTE With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action On the highways Slow down In city traffic While stopped put transaxle in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop
105. ARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91 Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR 1 Place the child seat in the center of the seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the child seat Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat 5 To lock the seat belt pull down on the shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor Then allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor As the webbing retracts you will hear a clicking sound This means the seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor If it is locked you should not be able to pull out any web bing If the retractor is not locked repeat step 5 Finally pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the lap portion around the child restraint while you push the child restraint rearward and d
106. ASCAP message Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible CHANgE OIL Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The CHANgE OIL message will flash in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument cluster To reset ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 the oil change indicator system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following proce dure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position do not start the engine 2 Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly 3 times within 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position NOTE If the indicator message illuminates when you start the vehicle the oil change indicator system did not reset If necessary repeat this proced
107. Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your ve hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con tact anything that can burn The catalytic converter requires the use of un leaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device and may seriously reduce engine perfor mance and cause serious damage to the engine Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance have your vehicle serviced promptly Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and vehicle ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 437 Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scor
108. CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels can peel away and jam the player mechanism The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded Continued 242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CAUTION Continued e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting A CD a Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK
109. CHRYSLER eee 2014 200 _ OWNER S MANUAL VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefore DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your percep tions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judg ment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improve ments to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured Copyright 2013 Chrysler Group LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENT
110. Children should be turn the engine OFF and remove the ignition key warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal Once the key is removed the transmission is or the shift lever locked in PARK securing the vehicle against un Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle wanted movement or in a location accessible to children A child could When leaving the vehicle always remove the igni operate power windows other controls or move tion key and lock your vehicle the vehicle Continued Key Ignition Park Interlock This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK position The key can only be removed from the ignition 298 STARTING AND OPERATING Se when the ignition is in the LOCK position and once removed the transmission is locked in PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service Brake Transmission Shift Interlock System This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system BTSI that holds the shift lever in PARK unless the brakes are applied To shift the transmission out of PARK the ignition switch must be turned to the ON RUN position engine running or not and the brake pedal mu
111. Door Ist Press is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button When Driver Door 1st Press is selected you must press the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passen ger s doors When All Doors 1st Press is selected all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until Driver Door 1st Press or All Doors 1st Press appears Sound Horn With Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lamp with Lock feature To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235 Flash Lamp With Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn on lock feature selected To make your selection press and release the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears Headlamp Off Delay When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle To make your selection press the SELECT button until 0 30 60 or 90 seconds appears Headlamps With Wipers
112. EHICLE CONTENTS BS ll A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS 12 To Arm The System 000 0005 19 Ignition Key Removal 00 12 To Disarm The System 200 20 Key In Ignition Reminder 15 Tamper Alert y eadi maena E DE ee eee 21 Locking The Doors With The Key 15 B ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED 21 B SENTRY KEY uias ask eke SEE 15 Mi REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE Tee US E EEREERTTTOTEPT TORT 16 Il BODIPPED s 4a d oacnd 3 eoe hien inea 22 Customer Key Programming 17 To Unlock The Doors sanon esenea dossa ra 22 General Information llle 18 S IO POS TE DOORS aera eka ee Rees n E VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED 19 To Unlatch The Trunk 000 26 Rearming The System eee 19 Using The Panic Alarm 26 Programming Additional Transmitters 26 Transmitter Battery Replacement 26 General Information 0 27 REMOTE START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED 28 How To Use Remote Start i s sites ccs sorri 28 DOOR LOCK5 2035 dega ima EEEE EA 31 Manual Door Locks oana anaana 31 Power Door Locks eieseie siteres siras 32 Child Protection Door Lock System Rear DOOtS iiidaxes aby dt Sag tha Ds ae a 34 ll POWER WINDOWS
113. Emergencies for further information CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact full size or limited use temporary spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And Wheel If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle If your vehicle has this option refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation pattern Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the driver s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter T or S preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M T S Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip ment tire should be repaired or replaced and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first opportunity ee STARTING AND OPERATING 349 Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the
114. I Ju IS de 18 t jor S gt TEM ique B ub i i g i i i 3 i JE i Li H g i E 3 3 H i i p ied O Po T ein E op Ed i i l E 3 i E 8 i 3 eLecraome CONTROL OFF 010533317 6 INTRODUCTION WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in a collision or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire Owners Manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cau tions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is on the left front corner of the instrument panel and is visible from outside of the vehicle through the windshield This number also appears stamped on the right front door sill under the sill moulding and printed on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle the vehicle registration and title A Z Vehicle Identification Number INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS WARNING Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or death Stamped VIN Location NOTE It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR V
115. IVING THROUGH WATER Shallow Standing Water Driving through water more than a few inches Although your vehicle is capable of driving through centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure shallow standing water consider the following Cautions safety and prevent damage to your vehicle and Warnings before doing so Flowing Rising Water WARNING WARNING Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flow ing water can wear away the road or path s surface Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stopping and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you distances Therefore after driving through stand ing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes e Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your pas sengers and others around you 318 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through stand
116. If Engine Fails To Start 0 0 293 Ee E POMPE Dinas a4 aue After Starting 0 2 02 000 cc eee eees 295 SPE Ol seme A uns E ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED 295 E DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES 316 E AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 295 Acceleration ux a a race debe Pale ds 316 Traction 316 Key Ignition Park Interlock DOC eee ee 288 STARTING AND OPERATING Se ll DRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing Rising Water 0 4 Shallow Standing Water B POWER STEERING 0000 Power Steering Fluid Check E PARKING BRAKE 0000 ll ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS ll ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Anti Lock Brake System ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS Electronic Stability Control ESC 317 317 319 319 320 ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light 330 E TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 331 Tite Markings e ze 23 46a sawed ERE 331 Tire Identification Number TIN 335 Tire Terminology And Definitions 336 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 337 TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION 342 ire PreSSute 21s cues deste
117. If this occurs the Electronic Speed Control System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control ON OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle set speed To Activate Push the ON OFF button The Cruise Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The Cruise Indicator Light will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it To Set A Desired Speed Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON When the vehicle has reached the desired speed press the SET button and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET button 176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pushing the CANCEL button or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with out erasing the set speed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed push the RE
118. K firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated 302 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic REVERSE R or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision e With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop CAUTION NEUTRAL N Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause periods with the engine running The engine may be Severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational started in this range Apply the parking brake and shift Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 303 DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts throu
119. L Se e Air Conditioner Control Press this button to turn on the air conditioning during manual operation only When the air conditioning is turned on cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets selected with 045607559 the Mode control dial Press this but ton a second time to turn OFF the air conditioning An LED in the button illuminates when manual compressor operation is selected e Recirculation Control The system will automatically control recircu CX amp 5 lation However pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporarily put the system in recirculation mode This can be used when outside conditions such as smoke odors dust or high humidity are present Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate NOTE When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled In cold weather use of the Recirculation mode may lead to excessive window fogging The Recirculation mode is not allowed in defrost in order to improve window clearing Recirculation will be disabled auto matically if Defrost is selected Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows to fog If the interior of the windows begins to fog press the Recirculation button to return to outside air Some temp humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility For this reason the system will not all
120. N EMERGENCIES 401 t o t 060573996 mm Front Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location 4 Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be placed under the jacking location Once the jack is positioned turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged to the jacking location on the wheel to be changed Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 402 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 7 yN 0606016029 0606016030 Jack Engaged Front Jacking Location Jack Engaged Rear Jacking Location WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 403 5 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the jack handle Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability 6 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts CAUTION Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem 060633619 mm Mounting Spare Tire facing outward The vehicle could be damaged if the spare tire is mounted incorrectly 404
121. Phone and transfer of the call to the mobile phone 2 After the ignition is cycled to OFF a call can continue on the Uconnect Phone for a certain duration after which the call is automatically transferred from the Uconnect Phone to the mobile phone 3 An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF Uconnect amp Phone Features Language Selection To change the language that the Uconnect Phone is using e Press the w button to begin ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the language selection After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every Uconnect Phone language change operation only the language specific 32 name phone book is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and is usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect Phone is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Em
122. Playing MP3 Files serisi atenga dsandan rd 255 en INDEX 511 Uconnect Hands Free Phone 110 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 206 Uniform Tire Quality Grades sss e eteren ass 491 Universal Consumer Interface UCI Connector 263 Unleaded Gasoline 2 0 0 sess 364 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 50 Upholstery Care stipe o DR DER 454 Vanity Mirrors em ede Ge ER RR a 109 Variance Compass 00 ee eee eee eee 230 Vehicle Certification Label lesen 375 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 22d Rem RR 338 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage ea agasan nE eee 284 Viscosity Engine Oil 2 6 6 eee t 427 Voice Command Commands soa Saab rhe dae 142 System Operation ese asia eer dale bare s 140 Voice Training 4 ar he sese bee ivet eass 146 Voice Recognition System VR 06 140 Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 208 Warnings and Cautions iiie 6 Warranty Information lees 488 Washer Adding Fluid 0 00000 434 Washers Windshield 0000000008 169 Washing Vehicle s ae iea giman ei paaa e EE 451 Water Driving Through scs sses rereso ssr rieras 317 Wheel and Wheel Trim 0 5 452 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care 452 Wind B ffeting seb eR x e ees Window Fogging eescrsyinsrotesd iieiaei
123. Pod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED Connecting The iPod Or External USB E e EET Using This Feature 0 0 Controlling The iPod Or External USB Device Using Radio Buttons Play Mode 263 es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 List Or Browse Mode 00 267 Mi RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES 272 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BISA 269 WM CLIMATE CONTROLS 00 0 273 E STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS Manual Heating And Air Conditioning 273 IE BQUIPPED 42m me ARR RES IRR RE 270 Automatic Temperature Control ATC Radio Operation 0000 271 IE Equipped sesso E RR RR 277 CD Player sss eese 271 Operating Tips 02 000 cee cece cece ee 283 m ll CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE 272 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 1 Air Outlet 2 Side Window Demister Outlet 3 Instrument Cluster 4 Ignition Switch 5 Analog Clock 6 Radio 7 Passenger Airbag 8 Glove Compartment 9 Heated Seat Switch If Equipped 10 Hazard Switch 040136677 11 Storage Compartment 12 Climate Control 13 Trunk Release Button 14 Power Outlet UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER d ngog Y 6683830
124. Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting The Tone Balance And Fade Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob and BASS will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones 250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL es Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the mid range tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the treble tones Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fourth time and BALANCE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE SCROLL control knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Push the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob again to exit setting tone balance and fade MUSIC TYPE Button Pressing this button once will turn on the
125. RGO belts AREA e Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly WARNING e Do not leave children or animals inside parked Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon Continued monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can vehicles in hot weather Interior heat build up may cause serious injury or death Continued 96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee WARNING Continued eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO follow these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area f you are required to drive with the trunk liftgate rear doors open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high speed DO NOT use the recirculation mode e If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust system when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent mechanic ins
126. S button and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting To Increase Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can in crease speed by pushing the RES button The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph Pressing the RES button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established Metric Speed kmlh Pressing the RES button once will result in a 2 km h increase in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in an increase of 2 km h e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will continue to increase until the button is released then the new set speed will be established ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177 To Decrease Speed When the Electronic Speed Control is set you can de crease speed by pushing the SET button The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed of U S mph or Metric km h units U S Speed mph Pressing the SET button once will result in a 1 mph decrease in set speed Each subsequent tap of the button results in a decrease of 1 mph e If the button is continually pressed the set speed will
127. S PAGE 1 2 10 INTRODUCTION ctestetetecsedeatesesen tp etastinta drea SUIS Eta Rida Edd 3 HEN THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE l eee 9 I UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE sseee e 101 mm UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ien 203 A STARTING AND OPERATING aua toute theo pda rd ped wks Dau v pa Dawe Res 287 mmm WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 4 ctp s e e Ec RE RE EY TTE E EIER RUE BRE RR d 391 m MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 4299 534 3 EE hen ERE TE MW ESI UC SU RR d 417 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 426i tudo S PR ERN S VUE te UE demand oe dd 475 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 469 t kr tk RES RE RE CREER RR 483 9 INDEX 493 10 INTRODUCTION CONTENTS B INTRODUCTION 000 4 Hi VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 6 ll HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL 4 BM VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS 7 E WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS 6 4 INTRODUCTION Sas INTRODUCTION Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group LLC vehicle Be assured that it represents precision workmanship distinctive styling and high quality all essentials that are traditional to our vehicles This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is suppl
128. STANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero all one call two cancel three confirmation prompts four continue five delete six dial seven download eight edit nine emergency star English plus erase all pound Espanol add location Francais ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s help previous home record again language redial list names return to main menu return or main menu list phones select phone select mobile send mute set up phone settings or phone mute off set up new entry towing assistance no transfer call other Uconnect Tutorial pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesir
129. This will help blade performance To prevent freeze up of your windshield washer system in cold weather select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature range of your climate This rating information can be found on most washer fluid containers WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition have the exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required 436 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING CAUTION e Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Safety Tips Exhaust Gas in Things To Know
130. WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING e To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges 7 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 8 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the jack handle while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice Refer to Torque Specifications in this section for the correct lug nut torque If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 9 Lower the jack until it is free Remove the wheel blocks Reassemble the jack handle to the jack assem bly and stow it in the spare tire area Secure the assembly using the means provided Release the park ing brake before driving the vehicle WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided 10 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area and have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible 11 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct the tire pre
131. ad restraint refer to Adjusting Active Head Restraints in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle Resetting Active Head Restraints AHR 022607492 Hand Positioning Points On AHR If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at you must reset the head restraint on the driver s and front passenger seat You can recognize when the Active Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they 3 Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the have moved forward as shown in step three of the vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism resetting procedure a comfortable position 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 022607497 022607757 1 Downward Movement 3 Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism 2 Rearward Movement 4 The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock into the back decorative plastic half E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 For safety reasons have the Active Head Restraints checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System Em BeltAlert amp BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver and front passenger if equipped with front passenger BeltAlert to fasten their seat belts The feature is active whenever the ignition is on If the driver or front seat passenger is unbelted the Seat Belt Reminder Li
132. ad trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer collisions Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch STARTING AND OPERATING 381 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle The tongue weight of the trailer The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle The weight of the driver and all passengers 382 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the CAUTION trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must e Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle 805 km the new vehicle is driven The engine axle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for or other parts could be damaged the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo e Then during the first 500 miles 805 km that a for your vehicle trailer is towed do not drive over 50 mph 80 km h and do not make starts at full throttle This helps the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at To promote proper break in of your new vehicle drive the heavier loads train components the following guidelines are recom mended Towing Requirements ee STARTING AND OPERATING 383 WARNING Improper towing can lead to a collision Follow these
133. additional information Vehicle Odometer Messages When the appropriate conditions exist the odometer will display the following messages nnl d PEE Door Ajar ngde qq Trunk Ajar LoW tirE 0000 Low Tire Pressure CHANgE OIL Oil Change Required gASCAP c kd et arr es Fuel Cap Fault HOTOIL Engine Oil Temperature Exceeds Safe Threshold NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then warnings such as Low Tire Door Ajar and Trunk Ajar will display in the EVIC Refer to Elec tronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC for specific messages LoW tirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M HOTOIL When this message is displayed there is a engine oil over temperature condition When this condition occurs the HOTOIL message will be displayed in the odom eter along with a chime Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies gASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system or the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words gASCAP will display in the odometer display area If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odom eter reset button to turn off the g
134. adlights And Parking Lights Automatic Headlights If Equipped Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent Turning the end of the multifunction lever to the third for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for detent AUTO will activate the automatic headlight headlight operation system 031407548 031407553 Headlight Switch Headlight Switch 164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M With the engine running and the multifunction lever in the AUTO position the headlights will turn on and turn off based on the surrounding light levels Headlights With Wipers Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The Headlights with Wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Headlight Time Delay There is also a feature that delays turning off the vehicle lights for 30 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition switch is turned OFF To activate the headlight delay the multi function lever must be r
135. after the vehicle has come to a complete stop e Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Continued 296 STARTING AND OPERATING Ss CAUTION Continued WARNING Do not shift dd nie REVERS E NEU e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL TRAL r DRIVE when the engine 3s above idle if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal the speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot isdiemiy presi ne the brake pedal vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re verse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit NOTE You MUST press and hold the brake pedal while someone or something Only shift into gear when shifting out of PARK the engine is idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 297 WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a running Before exiting a vehicle always apply the number of reasons A child or others could be parking brake shift the transmission into PARK seriously or fatally injured
136. age or confined area Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon Remote Start Aborted Door Ajar oxide CO which is odorless and colorless Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in Remote Start Aborted Hood Ajar jury or death when inhaled e Remote Start Aborted Trunk Ajar e Keep Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitters away from children Operation of the Remote Start System windows door locks or other controls Remote Start Aborted System Fault could cause serious injury or death e Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled to the ON RUN position 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Enter Remote Start Mode Press and release the REMOTE START button x2 on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec onds The vehicle doors will lock the parking lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice if programmed Then the engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle NOTE e If an engine fault is present the vehicle will start and then shut down 10 seconds later e For security power window operation is disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote Start mode The engine can be started two consecutive times two 15 minute cycles with the RKE transmitter However the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON RUN position before you can repeat the start sequence for a thi
137. ain flush and refill with OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 as soon as possible Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery tank The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces 442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not open hot engine cooling system Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure e Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requiring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by ani mals or children do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground If ingested by a child or pet seek emergency assistance immediately Clean up any ground spills immediately Coolant Level Four Cylinde
138. alter the roof including adding a sunroof to your vehicle Do not add roof racks that require perma nent attachments bolts or screws for installation on the vehicle roof Do not drill into the roof of the SABIC do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the SABIC The area where the SABIC is located should remain free from any obstructions vehicle for any reason Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their body outside of the window SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint system Occupants including children who are up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 seriously injured or killed Occupants especially chil dren should not lean on or sleep against the door side windows or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate even if they are in an infant or child restraint Always sit upright as possible with your back against the seat back use the seat belts properly and use the appropriate sized child restraint infant restraint or booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the child Knee Impact Bolsters The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passengers and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bags Along with seat belts and pretensioners Advanced Front Air Bags work with the knee
139. an peel away and jam the player mechanism The Uconnect 130 is a single CD player Do not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already loaded e Dual media disc types one side is a DVD the other side is a CD should not be used and they can cause damage to the player EJECT Button Ejecting A CD a Press the EJECT button to eject the CD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 10 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF NOTE Bjecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on convertible or soft top models if equipped SEEK Button Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255 RW FF Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button works in a similar manner AM FM Button Press
140. and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced ESC Off Switch 330 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE To improve the vehicle s traction when driving with snow chains or starting off in deep snow sand or gravel it may be desirable to switch to the Partial Off mode by pressing the ESC Off switch Once the situa tion requiring ESC to be switched to the Partial Off mode is overcome turn ESC on again by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch This may be done while the vehicle is in motion ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light And ESC OFF Indicator Light The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light comes on continuously with the engine running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this tel ee light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your autho rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem diagnosed and corrected The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light lo cated in the instrument cluster starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light also
141. and updated to Uconnect Phone on the next phone connection Add Names To Your Uconnect amp Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the Uconnect Phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom mended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Other This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone book entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The Uconnect Phone will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phonebook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone Uconnect Phone automati cally downloads your mobile phone s phonebook Edit Uconnect amp Phonebook Entries NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehi
142. ap proximately three seconds If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required however the UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 conventional brake system will continue to operate nor mally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti Lock Brakes The ABS warning light should be checked frequently to assure that it is operating properly Turn the ignition key to the on position but do not start the vehicle The light should come on If the light does not come on have the system inspected by an authorized dealer 24 Electronic Stability Control ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light If Equipped The ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN position It should go out with the engine running If the ESC Activation Malfunction In dicator Light comes on continuously with the engine oe 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL running a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system If this light remains on after several ignition cycles and the vehicle has been driven several miles kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph 48 km h see your authorized dealer as soon as possibl
143. areful of motor traffic e To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground A IE 9 69 7 Jack Warning Label CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this vehicle NOTE Refer to the Spare Tire section of Tires General Information in Starting And Operating for information about the spare tire its use and operation 1 Remove the scissors jack and jack handle from the spare wheel as an assembly Turn the jack screw to the left to loosen and remove the jack handle from the jack assembly WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 399 NOTE The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack with two attachment points When the jack is partially expanded the tension between the two attachment points holds the jack handle in place 060600626 Removing Jack Handle From Jack 400 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the ground CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on locations other than those indicated in step 3 060641613 Jacking Locations 3 There is a front and rear jacking location on each side of the vehicle The plastic trim has been cut away to expose the jacking locations on the body WHAT TO DO I
144. atible parts CAUTION Replacing fuel system components with non ethanol compatible components can damage your vehicle Maintenance CAUTION Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85 in your vehicle It will cause difficulty in cold starting and may affect drivability 372 STARTING AND OPERATING ADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the left rear quarter panel of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle Fuel Filler Door STARTING AND OPERATING 373 After removing the gas cap place the gas cap tether cable over a hook on the inside of the fuel door This keeps the gas Ses cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle s surface e Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light MIL to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full 056800424 Tether Cable NOTE If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 374 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is being fil
145. ature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive speed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 494 INDEX EE About Your Brakes 0 ee ee eee 320 ABS Anti Lock Brake System 322 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 440 Adding F el mrss eai Ecrire mne et 372 Adding Washer Fluid zer Red 434 Additives Fuel sosea gitat 0000 eee eee eee 366 Du p CRM 59 Airbag Deployment 0 00000000006 69 Airbag Light ij civ esce Re ae dataa 66 Airbag Maintenance llle 7 Airbag Side oos esses ae odee nde SUPR ORE 62 Airbag Window Side Curtain 63 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 428 Air Conditioner Maintenance 430 Air Conditioning 0 0 elles 273 Air Conditioning Controls 0 0 273 Air Conditioning Filter 20 285 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 286 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 430 Air Conditioning System e ssie dacia ie aa 273 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 0 ee 343 Alarm System Security Alarm 217 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio lessen 260 Antifreeze Engine Coolant ills 439 Disposal kao e heo oe Rhe os 442 Anti Lock Brak
146. aximum cooling use the A C and recirculation buttons at the same time e ECONOMY MODE If economy mode is desired press the A C button to turn OFF the indicator light and the A C compressor Then select Panel Bi Level or Floor mode and move the temperature control to the desired temperature Mode Control Air Direction Rotate this control to choose from sev eral patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols on the con trol or a blend of two of these modes The closer the setting is to a particular symbol the more air distribution you receive from that mode 045607541 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275 e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instru ment panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear e Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions 276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets
147. ay feature is active ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and do not let children play with power windows Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children Occupants particu larly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Window Down If Equipped The front window controls on the driver and passenger door trim panels have an Auto Down feature These switches are labeled AUTO to indicate this capability Push the window switch past the first detent release and the window will go down automatically To open the window part way push the window switch to the first detent and release it when you want the window to stop To cancel the Auto Down movement operate the switch aS either in the up or down direction and release the switch For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature For vehicles equipped with EVIC the power window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off Opening either door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is program ma
148. belt or LATCH anchor ages or remove it from the vehicle Do not leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or accident it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause serious personal injury Children Too Large For Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the 78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se seatback should use the seat belt in a rear seat Use this simple 5 step test to decide whether the child can use the vehicle s seat belt alone 1 Can the child sit all the way back against the back of the vehicle seat 2 Do the child s knees bend comfortably over the front of the vehicle seat while they are still sitting all the way back 3 Does the shoulder belt cross the child s shoulder between their neck and arm 4 Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible touching the child s thighs and not their stomach 5 Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip If the answer to any of these questions was no then the child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle If the child is using the lap shoulder belt check belt fit peri odically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the
149. best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 427 CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the chemicals can damage your engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Engine Oil Viscosity 2 4L Engine MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell Helix is recommended for all operating tem peratures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on the engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compartment in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Lubricants that do not have both the engine oil certifi cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used Engine Oil Viscosity 3 6L Engine MOPAR SAE 5W 20 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all operating temperatures T
150. ble Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Auto Window Up With Anti Pinch Protection If NOTE Equipped e If the window runs into any obstacle during auto Lift the window switch fully upward to the second closure anti pinch protection will reverse the window detent release and the window will go up automatically direction and then go back down Remove the obstacle To cancel the Auto Up movement operate the switch and use the window switch again to close the window either in the up or down direction and release the switch e Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger To close the window part way lift the window switch to the auto reverse function unexpectedly during auto the first detent and release it when you want the window Closure If this happens pull the switch lightly to the to stop first detent and hold to close window manually WARNING When the window is almost closed there is no anti pinch protection To avoid personal injury be sure to clear your arms hands fingers and all objects from the window path before closing Reset Auto Up Should the Auto Up feature stop working the window probably needs to be reset To reactivate the Auto Up feature pull the window switch up to close the window co
151. ble by an authorized dealer CAUTION The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection All of the keys provided with your vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Always remove the Sentry Key from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat tended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN The PIN is required for authorized dealer replacement of keys Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the Customer Key Pro gramming procedure This procedure consists of pro gramming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the authorized dealer Customer Key Programming You can program new keys to the system if you have two valid Sentry Keys by performing the following proce dure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key
152. brake Check mounting of mats on a regular basis Always pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have control of the vehicle been removed for cleaning Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99 Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks Inspect sidewalls for cuts cracks and bulges Check the wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper cold inflation pressure Lights Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel Door Latches Check for positive closing latching and locking Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel power steering fluid if equipped or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E MIRRORS nauar 105 Phone Call Features eee 119 m Inside Day Night Mirr
153. bristle brush or metal polishes Do not use oven cleaner These products may damage the wheel s protective finish Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel s pro tective finish Only MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453 Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap resi
154. button to return to the beginning of the current selection or return to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first second of the current selection Pressing and holding the SEEK button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in CD and MP3 modes TIME Button Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF Press and hold the FF Fast Forward button and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Reverse button operates in a similar manner ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243 AM FM Button Press the button to select either AM or FM mode SET RND Button Random Play Button Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran domly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CDDA CD R CD RW MP3 and CDDA MP3 Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium
155. ch tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear pat terns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Both under inflation and over inflation affect the stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering NOTE Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or right Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or rear edge of the driver s side door At least once a month Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality pocket type pressure gauge Do not make a visual judge ment when determining proper inflation Tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage 344 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valv
156. ching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occurs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected or removed such as when diagnostic testing or for prolonged periods during very rough idle or malfunctioning operating conditions 438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Se Cooling System WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position The fan is tempera ture controlled and can start at anytime the ignition switch is in the ON position You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or r
157. cle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly Refer to Jump Starting in What To Do In Emergen cies for further information WARNING Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury Continued Without Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all 294 STARTING AND OPERATING Se the way to the floor and hold it there while cranking the engine This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again If the engine is flooded it may start to run but not have enough power to continue running when the key is released If this occurs continue cranking up to 15 seconds with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15 second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal held to the floor repeat the Normal Starting or Ex treme Cold Weather procedures With Tip Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting or Extreme Cold Weather proce dures it may be flooded To clear any e
158. cle is not in motion Automatic down loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit Next choose the number designation home work mobile or other that you wish to edit When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete Uconnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List Nam
159. cratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner 452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e e e e If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar cause that destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Trim Care e All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners abrasives or polishing compounds They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty USE ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH Used on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain this finish CAUTION Do not use scouring pads steel wool a
160. ctronically tance When towing you should allow for additional actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic of you Failure to do so could result in a collision brake controller is not required e Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg 386 STARTING AND OPERATING The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle CAUTION i but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 lbs 454 kg Refer to the following illustrations loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher SES brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size 2 0O stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for motoring safety SEO The Trailer Tow Package may include a four pin and seven pin wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer 057003766 harness and connector 1 Female Pins 4 Park NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle s 2 Male Pin 5 Left Stop Turn 3 Ground 6 Right Stop Turn wiring harness e 19 9 O0 O
161. d 158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Fold Flat Passenger Seatback The hard seatback features a work surface and a molded rim for retaining items stored on the seatback panel The recline handle on the front passenger seat also releases the seatback to fold forward 030933273 Fold Flat Front Passenger Seat Recline Lever UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159 Folding Rear Seat When returning the rear seatback to the upright position To provide additional storage area the rear seatback can i Hie araia ck AR ATENE be folded forward Pull on the loops to fold down either or both seatbacks WARNING e Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into position If the seatback is not securely locked into position the seat will not provide the proper stabil ity for child seats and or passengers An improp erly latched seat could cause serious injury e The rear cargo area of the vehicle with the rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down posi tion should not be used as a play area by children They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should be seated and using the proper restraint system Rear Seat Release Loops 160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD The rear seat is equipped with a folding armrest with To open the hood two latches must be released S ai 1 Pull the hood release
162. d It also allows you to lengthen or shorten the steering column The tilt telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the steering column Tilt Telescoping Lever To unlock the steering column push the lever downward To tilt the steering column move the steering wheel up ward or downward as desired To lengthen or shorten the steering column pull the steering wheel outward or push it inward as desired To lock the steering column in position pull the lever upward until fully engaged 174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Do not adjust the steering column while driving Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv ing with the steering column unlocked could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle Failure to vere ON OFF follow this warning may result in serious injury or death CANCEL j ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged the Electronic Speed Control takes over accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph 40 km h 1 ON OFF 3 SET The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the 2 RES 4 CANCEL right side of the steering wheel Electronic Speed Control Buttons ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175 NOTE In order to ensure proper operation the Elec tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at the same time
163. d Transmission turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it when the engine starts If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure For Vehicles Equipped With Tip Start Six Speed Trans mission turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will continue to run and it will disengage auto matically when the engine is running If the engine fails to start the starter will disengage automatically in 10 seconds If this occurs turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure ee STARTING AND OPERATING 293 Extreme Cold Weather Below 20 F Or 29 C WARNING Continued To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans mission cannot be started this way Unburned fuel If Engine Fails To Start could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehi
164. d adjust the seat Pulling Out The Latch Plate en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click WARNING e A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you prop erly In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly 022636663 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING 4 Position the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up e A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous Your on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs collision aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a colli
165. d ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle separately It is important that you distribute the load evenly over the front and rear axles Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier axles or suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight axle by axle and side by side Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you have exceeded either GAWR but the total load is within the specified GVWR you must redistribute the weight Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible ee STARTING AND OPERATING 377 To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towin
166. d release the compass button to display one of eight com pass headings the outside temperature and audio information if the radio is on if the EVIC display is not already displaying this screen NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229 Automatic Compass Calibration This compass is self calibrating which eliminates the need to calibrate the compass manually When the ve hicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will flash the CAL indicator until the compass is calibrated You may calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE A good calibration requires a level surface and an environment free from large metallic objects such as buildings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc 230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass
167. d then buckle it Do not lock the seatbelt Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with them WARNING Improper installation of a child restraint to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex actly when installing an infant or child restraint Continued WARNING Continued Child restraint anchorages are designed to with stand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR or a cinching latch plate or both Both types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip The ALR retractor can be switched into a locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor If it is locked the ALR will ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89 make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back Lap Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child into the
168. de of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces of a collision the best Continued 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far your injuries in a collision much worse You might as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in a collision hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back an
169. de windows The trim covering the side air bags is labeled SRS AIRBAG This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB to provide enhanced protection for an occupant during a side impact The SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment e After any collision the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer immediately Air Bag System Components Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag system components Occupant Restraint Controller ORC ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e Air Bag Warning Light e Steering Wheel and Column e Instrument Panel Knee Impact Bolsters e Driver Advanced Front Air Bag e Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag e Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC e Front and Side Impact Sensors e Front Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat Belt Buckle Switch and Seat Track Position Sensors Advanced Front Air Bag Features The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags This system provides output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC which may receive information from the front impact sensors The first stage inflator is triggered immediat
170. due e Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of protectants on Stain Repel products 454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Interior Care Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use pro tectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean or equiva lent then MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover or equivalent if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armor All Use MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPARQ Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom mended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean or equivalent Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents detergents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather condi tioner is not required to maintain the original
171. e the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only Temporary high pressure com pact spare tires have the letter T or S molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 333 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger car tire based on European design standards LT Light truck tire based on U S design standards T or S Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 33
172. e Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value as shown in the Inflate to XX message Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Moni toring Telltale Light and LOW TIRE message will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists The ee STARTING AND OPERATING 359 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off NOTE when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM senso
173. e Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles 370 290 STARTING AND OPERATING Se SALINE E 371 W TRAILER TOWING 53m ek Ged aes 376 Cruising Range 2 6 eee 371 Common Towing Definitions 377 Replacement Parts 0000 371 Trailer Hitch Classification 379 Maintenance ee eee eee eee 371 Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer W ADDING FUEL eee ees Be Re Re ac aetncme rece gsbanco yn di Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap oo ee eee eee eee 372 Trailer And Tongue Weight 381 Loose Filler Cap Message 374 TG SUIS NS sinha eta MO dua ae W VEHICLE LOADING 00 0000005 iad i a a eae eeu ms Vehicle Certification Label oo soe se ss WW RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND COSS Vetucle TNGIGUYE Rane OWE spi ds Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle 389 tops AXE WEES RAEN KCRW ER Ei bates We Recreational Towing All Models 390 Overloading eass ea eine ne rele eo EG 376 Loading 4 iae Ben Ghee aR ae a 376 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 291 STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING Continued Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust the inside and outside mirrors fasten your seat belt and if in a location accessible to children A child could
174. e System ABS iliis 322 Anti Lock Warning Light llle 322 Appearance Care cst ahi rinia Rer Ee regis 450 P cur P rr 194 Assistance Towing llle 124 Auto Down Power Windows sess 37 Automatic Dimming Mirror 106 Automatic Door Locks 0 0000000 33 Automatic Oil Change Indicator 214 Automatic Temperature Control ATC 277 Automatic Transaxle se sesama llle 12 Automatic Transmission s sassa ea maea d k 295 en INDEX 495 Adding Fluid iere RR md 447 Fluid and Filter Changes 0 450 Fluid Level Check 000 000 eee 447 Fluid Ty peti ua Shoe ge retreat we as 446 Gear Ranges ias edem ede RES E it sks 299 Special Additives chs se ee 447 Autostick i ollas uz eh gh ee 314 Auto Unlock Doors llle 33 Auto Up Power Windows llle 38 Battery ss d deed SS RR qe eed gos 429 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 Location eani fie eexi xu YOUR Ae URDU 429 Belts Seat ceitnre rie kean ee ees 96 Body Mechanism Lubrication sese 433 B Pillar Location sse 337 Brake Assist System llle 326 Brake Parking eee n ene e ea 320 Brake 5ystem s i cavere ek dpa gm a 444 Anti Lock ABS 1 5 Rem e 322 Fid Check amp ek iem enema 444 Master Cylinder 22s ecce so Re dee baw 444 Parking c m eene ia 320 Warnung Light 22532 e Ries e bed xs 211 Brake Transmission In
175. e Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button For vehicles equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button use the TUNE SCROLL control to select SET CLOCK and then follow the above procedure starting at step 2 For vehicles not equipped with satellite radio press the SETUP button and then follow the above procedure starting at step 2 INFO Button Press the INFO button for an RDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only RW FF
176. e by one one button press per update until the proper variance zone is selected according to the map NOTE The Variance Values will wrap around from 15 back to 1 The Default Variance is Zone 8 04050640 Average Fuel Economy Compass Variance Map Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset To Change Compass Variance Average Fuel Economy can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from the last fuel 2 Press and release the MENU button until Personal average reading before the reset Settings displays in the EVIC 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Leave the shift lever in PARK 232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level DTE cannot be reset NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE display value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles 48 km estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a sig
177. e display through the various Trip Functions or Personal Settings COMPASS Button Press and release the COMPASS button to A display the compass heading the outside tem perature and Audio Info when the radio is on screen when the current screen is not the compass outside temp audio info screen 041036449 EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons 226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg SELECT Button Press and release the SELECT Button to accept a selection The SELECT Button also resets various Trip Functions gt Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Displays When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages e e Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime after one mile traveled Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime RKE Remote Keyless Entry Battery Low with a single chime Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle Not In PARK Personal Settings Not Avail Vehicle in Motion Door Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which door is open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion Doors Ajar with vehicle graphic showing which doors are open A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in motion Trunk Open with vehicle graphic showing and open trunk and A single chime L
178. e fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturer s recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further informa tion PARKING BRAKE Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is fully applied Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK 054163881 Parking Brake The parking brake lever is located in the center console To apply the parking brake pull the lever up as firmly as ee STARTING AND OPERATING 321 possible To release the parking brake pull the lever up slightly press the center button then lower the lever completely When the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch ON the Brake Warning Light in the instrument cluster will illuminate NOTE e When the parking brake is applied and the transmis sion is placed in gear the Brake Warning Light will flash If vehicle speed is detected a chime will sound to alert the driver Fully release the parking brake before attempting to move the vehicle e This light only shows that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application When parking on a hill it is important to turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill g
179. e headliner out of the way and covers the window The air bag inflates in about 30 milliseconds about one quarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes with enough force to injure you if you are not belted and seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag inflates This especially applies to children The side curtain air bag is only about 3 1 2 in 9 cm thick when it is inflated ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Front And Side Impact Sensors In front and side impacts impact sensors can aid the ORC in determining appropriate response to impact events Enhanced Accident Response System In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment if the communication network remains intact and the power remains intact depending on the nature of the event the ORC will determine whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow ing functions Cut off fuel to the engine e Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is turned off Turn on the interior lights which remain on as long as the battery has power or until the ignition key is removed Unlock the doors automatically In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System functions after a
180. e i WNdOW Saesaare Reo a a wares amp POWOEF aaa Asa ea ed ee sae a be Eine ae oe Windshield Defroster 512 INDEX eas Windshield Washers llle 169 FNAL sss ation ee tenses eR eng om qr PER 434 Windshield Wiper Blades 0 434 Windshield Wipers llle 169 Wiper Blade Replacement 4 434 Wipers Intermittent 0 00 aaa 170 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave
181. e is reduced NOTE The vehicle speed is reduced to a maximum of 48 mph 77 km h You may of course reduce your vehicle speed further if needed 394 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Proper lug nut bolt torque is very important to ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle the lug nuts bolts should be torqued using a properly calibrated torque wrench Torque Specifications Lug Nut Bolt Torque Lug Nut Lug Nut Bolt Size Bolt Socket Size 100 Ft Lbs 135 N m M12 x 125 19 mm Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles 0605005441 Wheel Mounting Surface WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 395 Tighten the lug nuts bolts in a star pattern until each nut bolt has been tightened twice WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the hicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off 0605006372 ibe 8 8 the road to avoid the danger of being hit when Torque Patterns operating the jac
182. e outside air position for maximum defogging e The A C will engage automatically to prevent fogging when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode control is set to panel or Bi Level Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes If the Recirculation button is pressed while in Defrost mode the LED indicator will flash several times then go out Recirculation will be disabled automatically when Defrost mode is selected e The A C can be deselected manually without disturb 045607534 ing the node contol selecdor Automatic Temperature Control e When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position the recirculation feature will be cancelled 278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Automatic Operation The Automatic Temperature Control system automati cally maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger Operation of the system is quite simple 1 Turn the Mode Control knob on the right and the Blower Control knob on the left to AUTO NOTE The AUTO position performs best for front seat occupants only 2 Dial in the temperature you would like the system to maintain by rotating the Temperature Control knob Once the comfort level is selected the system will maintain that level automatically using the heating system Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning the system will automatically make the adjustment 045607778
183. e remote positive battery post of the discharged vehicle If frequent jump starting is required to start your vehicle you should have the battery and charging system in spected at your authorized dealer 412 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME CAUTION Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough without engine operation the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the engine from starting FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved using a rocking motion Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator Use the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will main tain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the engine CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure Allow the en gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every five rocking motion cycles This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of transmission failure during prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle NOTE Press the ESC Off switch to place the Electronic Stability Control ESC
184. e seconds after pressing the SET RND button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC Button Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to Disc modes ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241 Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a
185. e stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure build up or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds mainta
186. e to have the problem diagnosed and corrected NOTE The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN Each time the ignition is turned to ON RUN the ESC system will be ON even if it was turned off previously The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation 25 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light i Each tire including the spare if provided H should be checked monthly when cold and in flated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated E UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219 Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated
187. e will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pres sure The TPM System will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire The TPM System will continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recom mended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light illumi nates you must increase the tire pressure to the recom mended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need 356 STARTING AND OPERATING Se to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this informa tion For example your vehicle may have a recommended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 30 psi 207 kPa If the ambient temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi 186 kPa a temperature drop to 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 23 psi 158 kPa This tire pressure
188. ear axle Too much rear seatbacks in the locked up or folded down weight or improperly placed weight over or behind the position should not be used as a play area by rear axle can cause the rear of the vehicle to sway children when the vehicle is in motion They could be seriously injured in a collision Children should Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the be seated and using the proper restraint system seatback This could impair visibility or become a dan To help protect against personal injury passengers 8 rOus projectile in a sudden stop or collision should not be seated in the rear cargo area The rear cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes only not for passengers who should sit in seats and use seat belts The weight and position of cargo and passengers can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury follow these guidelines for loading your vehicle 200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Ski Pass Through There is a ski pass through door located behind the rear seat armrest that allows longer items such as snow skis to be stored in the rear cargo area Lower the armrest and pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass through door REAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster ste The rear window defroster button is located on the climate control Mode knob Press this button to tur
189. ease the brightness of the instrument panel lights when the park ing lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last detent to turn on the interior lighting 031407549 Dimmer Control 168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Map Reading Interior Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror Each light can be turned on by pressing the barrel Press the barrel a second time to turn the light off Both of these lights can swivel so that the light can be aimed at a specific spot if desired The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle They will not turn off automatically Interior lighting also comes on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent Map Reading Lights There is a second light located midway back in the headliner To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169 because a door is open To restore interior light operation eith
190. ed is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 310 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK OFF position to the ON RUN position and also press the brake pedal Otherwise damage to the shift lever could result DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range as this can damage the drivetrain The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi tion e When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is fully seated Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK position With brake pedal released verify that the shift lever will not move out of PARK REVERSE R This range is for moving the vehicle backward Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL N Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged periods with the engine running The engine may be started in this range Appl
191. ed op eration VOICE COMMAND IF EQUIPPED Voice Command System Operation gt The Uconnect Voice Command system allows 4 VR you to control your AM FM radio disk player USB mass storage class device iPod family of devices Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device satellite radio disc player and a memo recorder NOTE Take care to speak into the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as possible The ability of the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death When you press the Voice Command EVR button you will hear a beep The beep is your signal to give a command NOTE If you do not say a command within a few seconds the system will present you with a list of options If you would like to interrupt the system while it lists options press the Voice Command EVR button listen for the beep and say your command Pressing the Voice Command VR button while the system is speaking is known as barging in The system will be interrupted and after the beep you can add or change
192. edia Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders 246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the DISC AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when ignition is OFF UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247 Uconnect 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic V
193. eel to switch the headlights to low beam 29 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Dis play If Equipped This display shows the EVIC messages when the appro priate conditions exist Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC for further information MINI TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED The Mini Trip Computer is located in the instrument cluster and features a driver interactive trip information and temperature display NOTE The system will display the last known outside temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to be driven several minutes before the updated tempera ture is displayed Engine temperature can also affect the displayed temperature therefore temperature readings are not updated when the vehicle is not moving es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223 Control Buttons RESET Button To reset the display shown turn the ignition switch to the ON position then press and hold the RESET button located on the steering wheel The following displays can be reset or changed e Trip A e Trip B m Trip Odometer ODO This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the STEP button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to Trip A or Trip B Trip A Mini Trip Control Buttons Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last STEP Button reset 040541179 Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to Trip B
194. eft side impact deploys the left air bag only and a right side impact deploys the right air bag only Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC SABIC air bags may offer side impact protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that provided by the body structure Each air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side impact head injuries The SABIC air bags deploy down ward covering both windows on the impact side M 022632670 Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC Location NOTE Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open during air bag deployment 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during WARNING Continued deployment could cause you to be severely injured or killed Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects e between you and the side air bags the performance The system includes side impact sensors that are cali could be adversely affected and or objects could be brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that pushed into you causing serious injury require air bag occupant protection Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags do not have any accessory items installed which will WARNING Your vehicle is equipped with left and right Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
195. elerate the clearing process Headlamp 1 Raise and prop open the hood Locate the connector behind the headlamp NOTE To service the driver s headlamp it will be necessary turn the steering wheel and remove the inner fender to access the headlamp bulb MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465 2 To begin removal of the driver side headlamp reachin To begin removal of the passenger side headlamp reach in through the inner fender or from the engine compart through the engine compartment and grasp the bulb cover ment and grasp the bulb cover Headlamp Bulb Cover Headlamp Assembly 1 Headlamp 2 Turn Signal 466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 3 Rotate bulb cover and one quarter turn and pull outward from assembly Headlamp Bulb Removal Headlamp Bulb Cover Removal CATON 4 Rotate bulb and connector one quarter turn and pull Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil outward from assembly contamination will severely shorten bulb life 0733007013 5 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace the bulb 0733007015 Headlamp Bulb 6 If the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface wipe the bulb with a clean cloth and rubbing alcohol 7 Reinsert the bulb and socket assembly and rotate clockwise one quarter turn to secure MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467 8 Place bulb cover back and rotate one quarter turn clockwise to secure Front Turn Signal 1 Raise and prop open the
196. eling 4 etr ohne Ree e ee bg eges 372 Fuel System Caution llle 373 lui c NC 456 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 178 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 4 bre des ene 372 Gasoline Clean Air llle 364 Gasoline Reformulated 000005 364 Gauges Coolant Temperature llis 208 Feline Deere ee eee Hed oe 208 Odometer iiw rsen 9 EE s 212 Tachometer os Ain es gu Ge ake RUE Stew a ees 212 G ar Ranges a ce eid a pee et one bg te 299 Gear Select Lever Override lulu 413 General Information llle 140 Glass Cleaning veii aeania aane Aia ENA eee 455 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 375 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 375 GVWR snus oes Senet awe eee x Ee eee vas 375 en INDEX 501 Hands Free Phone Uconnect 110 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Waters ics sss cese OR RR Ra 317 Hazard Warning Flasher 045 392 Headlights 1593 perire RI ere Reha 464 Bulb Replacement ies toccasse setesi neri 464 Cleaning so state nubes eats ence E 453 High Beam sa sr cera oP ERE EA tees 165 High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 165 On With Wipers ies eet ions ewes 164 PASSING ac oe oe eee ga PRES NP RE an s 166 Replacing s bd oer susce Reed e bore ae ot 464 SWIER i2 BRAS es SOS Has ia eR Es 163 Head Restraints 00000 0004 154 Heated Mirrors 0 0 0 eee 109 Heated Sea
197. ely during an impact that requires air bag deployment This low output is used in less severe collisions A higher energy output is used for more severe collisions WARNING e No objects should be placed over or near the air bag on the instrument panel because any such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate Continued 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE WARNING Continued e Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or attempt to open them manually You may damage the air bags and you could be injured because the air bags may no longer be functional The protective covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee bolster in any way Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster such as alarm lights stereos citizen band radios etc Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB may provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant during a side impact The SAB is marked with an air bag label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats b Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bag Label ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 When the air bag deploys it opens the seam between the front and side of the seat s trim cover Each air bag deploys independently a l
198. ement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers 022636666 Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations 1 Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags 2 Knee Bolster 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags are certified to new Federal regulations The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator design This allows the air bag to have different rates of inflation that are based on several factors including the severity and type of collision This vehicle may be equipped with driver and or front passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat position This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened The seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC they are located above the si
199. emented by Warranty Information and various customer oriented documents Please take the time to read these publications carefully Following the instruc tions and recommendations in this manual will help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After reviewing the owner information it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc ing and remain with the vehicle when sold When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has factory trained tech nicians and genuine parts and cares about your satisfac tion HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the items of equipment ordered certain descriptions and illustrations may differ from your vehicle s equipment The detailed index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual INTRODUCTION 5 Cd iO Iglo i ED m I ELECTRONIC STABILITY ii t p i i i i du E Y O T i amp i i x s Di i i f 3 i i E A Dp iw EI i Nc CO t 8 2 i f i 1910 cS H D ie ima la im TI i i i i i i i i i i i i HEATED i I q E
200. en the lamp outboard ball stud and plastic grommet from inside the trunk can help to disengage the outboard edge of the tail lamp MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469 3 Grasp the tail lamp by both the outboard and inboard sides and pull firmly to disengage the tail lamp from the vehicle NOTE It is normal to hear a loud sound when the lower tail lamp area unsnaps from the vehicle mounting bracket during tail lamp removal 470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE License Plate Lamp 1 Using a small screwdriver press inward the locking tab on the side of the lamp assembly and pull down on the lamp assembly for removal 2 Pull bulb from socket replace and reinstall the lamp assembly into place ensuring the locking tab is secure 073310824 Tail Lamp Housing 4 Twist and remove socket from lamp 5 Remove bulb from socket and replace 6 Reinstall the tail lamp fasteners and trunk liner ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471 FLUID CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate All Engines Except 2 4L PZEV 16 9 Gallons 64 Liters 2 4L PZEV Partial Zero Emissions Vehicle 18 5 Gallons 70 Liters Engine Oil With Filter 2 4L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 4 5 Quarts 4 26 Liters 3 6L Engine SAE 5W 20 API Certified 6 Quarts 5 6 Liters Cooling System 2 4L Engine MOPAR Antifreeze Engine Coolant 10 7 7 Quarts 7 3 Liters Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent 3 6L Engine MOPAR Antifree
201. end of the jumper cable to the Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could negative post of the booster battery result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion 4 Connect the opposite end of the negative jumper cable to the remote negative post of the vehicle with the discharged battery E WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 411 WARNING Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative post of the discharged battery The resulting electri cal spark could cause the battery to explode and could result in personal injury Only use the specific ground point do not use any other exposed metal parts Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes and then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery Once the engine is started remove the jumper cables in the reverse sequence Disconnecting The Jumper Cables T Disconnect the negative jumper cable from the remote negative post of the vehicle with the dis charged battery Disconnect the negative end of the jumper cable from the negative post of the booster battery Disconnect the opposite end of the positive jumper cable from the positive post of the booster battery Disconnect the positive 4 end of the jumper cable from the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle Reinstall the protective cover over th
202. engage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Front Courtesy Reading 578 WSW Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw Lamp Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery eii Courtesy Reading 578 WOW amp e Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of Vanity Lamp A6220 service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the i air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes G e Dor Lamp A6220 in the fresh air and high blower setting This will Shift Indicator Lamp IKLE14140 ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the Rear Compartment 579 possibility of compressor damage when the system is Trunk Lamp started again NOTE For lighted switches see your authorized dealer for replacement 464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Exterior Bulbs Bulb Number Bi Halogen Headlamp HIR2 Front Turn Signal Lamp 3157NAK Front Park Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Front Fog Lamp H11 Center High Mounted Stop CHMSL Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Rear Tail Stop Turn Sig nal Lamp LED Serviced at Autho rized Dealer Backup Lamp 921 License Lamp W5W Front Side Marker Lamp WYSW BULB REPLACEMENT NOTE Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo spheric conditions This will usually clear as atmospheric conditions change to allow the condensation to change back into a vapor Turning the lamps on will usually acc
203. ent engine damage 13 Shift Lever Indicator The Shift Lever Indicator is self contained within the instrument cluster It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 14 Odometer Display Trip Odometer Display The odometer display shows the total distance the ve hicle has been driven U S Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced the repair technician should leave the odometer reading the same as it was before the repair or service If s he cannot do so then the odometer must be set at zero and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was before the repair or service It is a good idea for you to make a record of the odometer reading before the repair service so that you can be sure that it is properly reset or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage To switch from odometer to trip odometers press and release the Trip Odometer button To reset a trip odom eter display the desired trip odometer to be reset then push and hold the button until the display resets ap proximately 2 seconds Refer to Trip Odometer Button for
204. ent shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant expansion bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added the contents of the coolant expansion bottle must also be protected against freezing If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at a minimum of 50 OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed 444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M e Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatisfactory engine coolant antifreeze performance poor gas mileage and increased emissions Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING
205. equipped child seats There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position These anchorages are used to install LATCH equipped child seats without using the vehicle s seat belts Some seating positions may have a top tether anchorage but no lower anchorages In these seating positions the seat belt must be used with the top tether anchorage to install the child restraint Please see the following table for more information THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81 LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle 0226002256 e Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seat ing position e S Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es What is the weight limit child s weight 65 Ibs 29 5 kg Use the LATCH anchorage system until the weight of the child restraint for using the combined weight of the child and the child LATCH anchorage system to attach the child restraint is 65 lbs 29 5 kg Use the seat belt restraint and tether anchor instead of the LATCH an chorage system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs 29 5 kg Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt No Do not use the seat belt when you use the be used together to attach a rear facing or LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear forward facing child restraint facing or f
206. er Maintenance A C Air Filter If Equipped Body Lubrication 000 Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid O Exhaust System 0000000 08 435 Cooling System ses rs sees e ge cee ee eas 438 418 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Brake System iege Rem ed 444 Automatic Transmission s 446 Appearance Care And Protection From COrfFOSIOfl iure ere ee e d 450 Cleaning Center Console Cupholders 456 B FUSES 22e 9 eer ERES 456 Integrated Power Module 457 Bl VEHICLE STORAGE 0 00 0 463 E REPLACEMENT BULBS send ntm ome 463 E BULB REPLACEMENT 464 Headlamp cetei sets ee es Be eae 464 Front Turn Signal llle 467 Front Fog Lamp i RR ges 468 Backup Lamps ecc erineda aa 000000 ee 468 License Plate Lamp 00 470 B FLUID CAPACITIES 1 3 CORR XR ERROR sad A71 E FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARIS 2 52 22 rd vache term e Ae eres Ed 472 Engine s cess cp aoreet ae Ronnie S s eee ace d 472 CHASSIS ics eds ade dites eh asp eit eot sug 473 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 419 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Integrated Power Module Fuses 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 Power Distribution Center Fuses 10 Engine Oil Dipstic
207. er reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired whichever come first If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in What To Do In Emergencies for further information es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 11 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a problem with the anti lock brake system BRAKE The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system Failure of either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehic
208. er than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings sion components You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or Due to limited clearance tire chains or traction devices capacity other than what was originally equipped are not recommended TIRE CHAINS TRACTION DEVICES on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have a collision CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used Continued 354 STARTING AND OPERATING TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with ageressive tread designs such as those
209. er turn the ignition switch ON or cycle the light switch Battery Saver Feature To protect the battery the interior lights will turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is moved to the LOCK position This will occur if the interior lights were switched on manually or are on because a door is open WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS AS The wipers and washers are operated by a switch on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column 031508787 Windshield Wiper Washer Lever Rotate the end of the lever to the LO position for low speed wiper operation or to the HI position for high speed wiper operation 170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se 031508788 Changing Wiper Speeds NOTE The wipers will automatically return to the park position if you turn the ignition switch OFF while they are operating The wipers will resume operation when you turn the ignition switch to the ON position again CAUTION e Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents the windshield wiper blades from returning to the off position If the windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position damage to the wiper motor may occur Intermittent Wiper System Use the
210. er with the arrow on the filter pointing toward the floor When installing the filter cover make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the cover CAUTION The A C air filter is identified with an arrow to indicate airflow direction through the filter Failure to install the filter properly will result in the need to replace it more often 072600634 AJC Aix Blier Replacement 8 Reinstall the glove box door dampener and glove box 6 Remove the A C Air Filter by pulling it straight out of Body Lubrication the housing Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate decklid sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy 434 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M operation and to protect against rust and wear Prior to the application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mecha nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR
211. ergency and the Uconnect Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available mobile service and area 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press the w button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The Uconnect Phone does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the mobile phone directly WARNING To use your Uconnect Phone System in an emer gency your mobile phone must be e turned on paired to the Uconnect System e and have network coverage Roadside Assistance Towing Assistance If you need roadside assistance e Press the button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE You should program the desired Towing Assis tance phone number using the Voice Command system To do this press the button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance When prompted say 1 800 521 2779 for U S Canada say 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico Paging To learn how to page refer to Working wit
212. es to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the vRbutton while the Uconnect Phone is playing the desired entry and say Delete e After you enter the name the Uconnect Phone will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile other or all Say the designation you wish to delete e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 Delete Erase All Uconnect Phonebook Entries e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say e Press the w button to begin Fnonebook tise Name e The Uconnect Phone will play the names of all the Arter ie Ready prompt amitie following beep aay phonebook entries including the downloaded phone Phonebook Erase All book entries if available e The Uconnect Phone will ask you to verify that you E 3 wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook To call one of the names in the list press the ve but ton during the playing of the desired name and say After confirmation the phonebook entries will be Call deleted e NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete NOTE operations at this point e Only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e The Uconnect Phone will
213. es the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it TIME Button Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time and radio frequency Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob 3 After adjusting the hours press the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE SCROLL control knob Press the TUNE SCROLL con trol knob to save time change es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239 5 To exit press any button knob or wait five seconds RW FF Pressing the RW Rewind or FF Fast Forward buttons causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM or FM frequencies TUNE Control Turn the rotary TUNE SCROLL control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency Setting The Tone Balance And Fade
214. ese special requirements are included in MOPAR engine oils and in equivalent oils meeting Chrysler Specification MS 6395 The manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Material Standard MS 6395 MS 6395 contains additional requirements developed during ex tensive fleet testing to provide additional protection to Chrysler Group LLC engines Use MOPAR or an equivalent oil meeting the specification MS 6395 ee STARTING AND OPERATING 371 Starting The characteristics of E 85 fuel make it unsuitable for use when ambient temperatures fall below 0 F 18 C In the range of 0 F 18 C to 32 F 0 C you may experience an increase in the time it takes for your engine to start and a deterioration in driveability sags and or hesitations until the engine is fully warmed up NOTE Use of the engine block heater if equipped is beneficial for E 85 startability when the ambient tempera ture is less than 32 F 0 C Cruising Range Because E 85 fuel contains less energy per gallon liter than gasoline you will experience an increase in fuel consumption You can expect your miles per gallon mpg miles per liter and your driving range to decrease by about 30 compared to gasoline operation Replacement Parts Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle FFV are designed to be compatible with ethanol Always be sure that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com p
215. everal seconds of transmission Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release cycle your hand held transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indi cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you are programming 5 Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink but
216. exits through a bezel in the panel Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors ALR which are used to secure a child restraint system For additional information refer to Installing Child Re straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt under the Child Restraints section The chart below defines the type of feature for each seating position Driver Center Passenger First Row N A N A ALR Second ALR ALR ALR Row e N A Not Applicable e ALR Automatic Locking Retractor If the passenger seating position is equipped with an ALR and is being used for normal usage Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant s mid section so as to not activate the ALR If the ALR is activated you will hear a ratcheting sound as the belt retracts Allow the webbing to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort ably wrap around the occupant s mid section Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a click 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Automatic Locking Retractor Mode ALR If Equipped In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The Automatic Locking Mode is avail able on all passenger seatin
217. flashes when TCS is active If the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during ac celeration ease up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions NOTE e The ESC Off Indicator Light and the ESC Activation Malfunction Indicator Light come on mo mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON STARTING AND OPERATING 331 e Each time the ignition is cycled ON the ESC system TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION will be ON even if it was cycled off previously Tire Markings e The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active This is normal the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that caused the ESC activation The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the amp Electronic Stability Control ESC is partially off OFF 054903773 1 US DOT Safety Standards 4 Maximum Load Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades 332 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard hav
218. for proper tire inflation procedures ratings are not exceeded Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres 1 Max loading as defined on the Tire and Loading sures before trailer usage Information placard 2 GTW Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General 3 GAWR Information in Starting And Operating for the 4 Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti proper mepecnon ea lized e When replacing tires refer to Tires General Infor mation in Starting And Operating for the proper tire replacement procedures Replacing tires with a e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact higher load carrying capacity will not increase the spare tire vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limits Towing Requirements Tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 385 Towing Requirements Trailer Brakes WARNING e Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or j vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy This could cause inadequate braking and possible draulic brake lines It can overload your brake system lini and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when persona injury aei you need them and could have a collision e An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is e Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis required when towing a trailer with ele
219. fore Starting Your Vehicle for further information 8 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN this light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Warning Light will 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL flash or remain on continuously Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information 9 Oil Pressure Warning Light TH this light indicates low engine oil pressure The light will come on and remain on when the ignition switch is turned from the OFF to the ON RUN position and the light will turn off after the engine is started If the bulb does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer If the light comes on and remains on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine DO NOT OPERATE THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine This can be determined using the procedure shown in Maintaining Your Vehicle 10 Engine Temperature Warning Light This light warns of an overheated engine condi tion As engine coolant temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound aft
220. frequent trailer 8 towing Change automatic transmission X fluid and filter Inspect and replace PCV valve if X necessary es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 481 The spark plug change interval is mileage based only yearly intervals do not apply WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent me chanic e Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve hicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance This could cause an accident M A l N T E N A N c I S e H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS lll SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech YOUR VEHICLE se xen ra RA 485 Impaired TDD TTY 000 487 Prepare For The Appointment 485 Service Contract uae rex Ene ee Re are 487 Prepare A Dist sse core RR Re 485 Mi WARRANTY INFORMATION 488 Be Reasonable With Requests 485 B MOPARG PARTS 0 000000 n 489 E IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE 485 W REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS 489 Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center 486 In T
221. frosters 284 Signals TED cs sacs aane eee Roin goal ese 99 Snow Chains Tire Chains 0 4 353 SEO Ws LIMOS rode desc e fags Sa Rb Ete aa do iens 346 Spare Tires soete Eae rade ee Ree Gaba eo 348 Speed Control Cruise Control issu 174 Speedometer s setro pegar Ra e Ree PE ae 208 Star ng iss e ex RES RESEE S 291 Automatic Transmission lessen 291 Cold Weather 0 000s 293 Engine Fails to Start 000000 293 Starting and Operating 205 291 Starting Procedures 0 0 sa cee ee eee 291 Steering POWOE 5 xd RS RUE Rd ea xus 319 Tilt Column iem Sac cyanea ds eee eee dacs 173 Wheel Tit viv ut iem RR nr ER een 173 Steering Wheel Audio Controls 270 Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls 270 eorr E 463 Storage Vehicle es aad atr dU nens 284 St ck Ereeing s iod bk b E REPRE 412 Sun ROO as de ene REN RUE ah we 187 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 59 Synthetic Engine Oil p sesten cede ed 428 Tachometer secs e ee ini ee ees 212 Taillights 2 62m mee Rm Dem D RI eem eda 468 Telescoping Steering Column 173 Temperature Control Automatic ATC 277 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 208 Tilt Steering Column llle 173 Time Delay Headlight 000 164 Tire and Loading Information Placard 337 Tire Markings ise esa LES peerRax
222. ft control refer to AutoStick in this section for further informa tion Moving the shift lever into the AutoStick position below the Drive position activates AutoStick mode providing manual shift control and displaying the cur rent gear in the instrument cluster i 1 Shift Lever Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range STARTING AND OPERATING 307 NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level surface you may shift the transmission into PARK first and then apply the parking brake When parking on a hill apply the parking brake before shifting the transmission to PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi cult to move the shift lever out of PARK As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the curb on a 308 STARTING AND OPERATING Se downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill WARNING Continued grade e It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL WARNING if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If
223. fuse for safety systems air bag system braking system power unit systems engine system gearbox system or steering system blows contact an authorized dealer Integrated Power Module The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses A label that identifies each component may be printed on the inside TT of the cover Refer to the graphic below for FUSES TIPM Integrated Power Module location Cas Xn Cavity tridge Description Fuse Fuse 1 40 Amp Power Top Module Green If Equipped 458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Ss ed Mini bd Mini Cavity tridge F Description Cavity tridge F Description use use Fuse Fuse 2 20 Amp Brake Vacuum 7 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw Yellow Pump Green IOD Sense 1 3 10 Amp Center High 8 zx 30 Amp Ignition Off Draw Red Mounted Stop Green IOD Sense 2 Light CHMSL 9 40 Amp Battery Feed Brake Switch Green Power Seats If 4 10 Amp Ignition Switch Equipped Red 10 20 Amp Instrument Panel 5 20 Amp Trailer Tow If Yellow Power Locks Yellow Equipped Interior Lights 6 10 Amp Power Mirror 11 15 Amp Selectable Power Red Switch Climate LtBlue Outlet Inside Cen Controls ter Arm Rest MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459 Red od M
224. g positions with a combina tion lap shoulder belt Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with this feature Children 12 years old and under should always be properly re strained in a vehicle with a rear seat How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode 1 Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is extracted 3 Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode WARNING e The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor ALR feature or any other seat belt function is not working properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual e Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in collisions ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 Energy Management Feature This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy Management feature in the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision
225. g related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certification Label in Starting and Operating for further information Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR Refer to Vehicle Loading Vehicle Certifica tion Label in Starting and Operating for further information 378 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded
226. gh all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers select the 3 range Under these conditions using the 3 range will improve perfor mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces sive shifting and heat buildup If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat ing limits the powertrain controller will modify the DRIVE and 3 range shift points This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold tempera tures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to second gear only Normal operation will re sume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level DRIVE 3 3 This range eliminates shifts into fourth gear The trans mission will operate normally in first and second gear Shifts into third
227. ght will 022607494 turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are AHR In Reset Position fastened NOTE The BeltAlert amp warning sequence begins after the vehicle e If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active speed is over 5 mph 8 km h by blinking the Seat Belt Head Restraints see an authorized dealer Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime Once the sequence starts it will continue for the entire duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened After the sequence completes the Seat Belt Reminder 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts are fastened The driver should instruct all other occu pants to fasten their seat belts If a front seat belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph 8 km h BeltAlert will provide both audio and visual notification The front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the front passenger seat is unoccupied BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat if equipped It is recommended that pets be restrained in the rear seat if equipped in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts and cargo is properly stowed BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert NOTE Although Be
228. ging or overspeed condition would result It will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or downshift is chosen except as described below e The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop After a stop the driver should manually upshift the transmission as the vehicle is accelerated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 315 e You can start out from a stop in any gear except top gear Tapping at a stop will allow starting in second gear Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions The transmission will automatically upshift when nec essary to prevent engine over speed If a requested downshift would cause the engine to over speed that shift will not occur Avoid using speed control when AutoStick is en gaged Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is engaged If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off e If the system detects a problem it will disable AutoStick mode and the transmission will return to automatic mode until the problem is corrected To disengage AutoStick mode return the shift lever to the DRIVE position You can shift in or out of the AutoStick position at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal WARNING Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a slippery
229. gram while keeping the HomeLink indicator light in view Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink button you want to program and the hand held trans mitter button Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi cator light The Homelink indicator will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink has received the frequency signal from the hand held transmitter Re lease both buttons after the indicator light changes from slow to rapid Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly program ming is complete and the garage door device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183 To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Non Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Canadian Gate Operator Programming For programming transmitters in Canada United States that require the transmitter signals to time out after s
230. h Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the Uconnect Phone Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Working With Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your Uconnect Phone to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some services re quire immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect Phone When calling a number with your Uconnect Phone that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your mobile phone keypad you can press the EvRbutton and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the vr button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored Uconnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice ma
231. h a new filter at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This manufacturer s engines have a full flow type oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil filter and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 429 WARNING Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required The air induction system air cleaner hoses etc can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air induction system air cleaner hoses etc unless such removal is necessary NOTE The battery is stored in a compartment behind for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is the left front fender and is accessible without removing near the engine compartment before starting the the tire and wheel Remote battery terminals are located vehicle with the air induction system air cleaner in the engine compartment for jump starting Refer to hoses etc removed Failure to do so can result in Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergen serious personal injury cies for further information
232. hat the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced 055007576 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the STARTING AND OPERATING 351 tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Refer to Replacement Tires in this section for further infor mation Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure ram e Distance driven Performance tires tires with a speed rating of V or higher and summer tires typically have a reduced tread life Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main tenance schedule is highly recommended 352 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have a collision resulting in serious injury or death Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics The
233. he 50 United States And Washington D C 489 O Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 486 O In Canada c e eR RE BS Aere gd 489 In Mexico Contact o oo sss 487 Wi PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS 490 ra 484 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M ll DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM Traction Grades coce ti are oea ta 00000 491 TIRE QUALITY GRADES 491 Treadweat xem amp Aa acetone vu S SES ated 491 Temperature Grades 000 492 en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 485 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you are having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a mi
234. he engine at normal idle speed for at least 60 seconds and leave the engine running for the rest of this procedure Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake pedal Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi tion allowing time for the transmission to fully en gage in each position ending with the transmission in PARK Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to prevent dirt from entering the transmission Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is driven at least 15 miles 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a temperature of approximately 80 F 27 C 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert it until seated Then remove the dipstick and note the fluid level on both sides The fluid level reading is only valid if there is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the actual level is at or above the hole e If the fluid is hot the fluid level should be in the crosshatched area marked HOT between the up per two holes in the dipstick e If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between the lower two holes in the area marked COLD If the fluid level is low add fluid through the dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level D
235. he words and phrases when prompted by Uconnect Voice For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be re peated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only SEATS Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the vehicle WARNING e It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Continued UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING Continued Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Power Seats If Equipped The power seat switches are located on the outboard side P of the seat near the floor Use the bottom switch to move a the seat up down forward rearward or to tilt the seat Power Seat Switches The top switch controls the seatback recliner 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede WARNING e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving cou
236. hicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance and durability of engine and fuel system components ee STARTING AND OPERATING 365 Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as Ethanol Fuels blended with oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso line containing more than 10 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability prob lems damage critical fuel system components cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard and or cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi nate Pump labels should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater than 10 Ethanol Problems that result from using gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10 Ethanol are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non Flex Fuel Vehicles FFV are compatible with gasoline containing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e Operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light o
237. hild restraint in a vehicle with a rear seat Older Children And Child Restraints Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their rear facing convertible child seat can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direc tion are for children who are over two years old or who ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77 have outgrown the rear facing weight or height limit of their rear facing convertible child seat Children should remain in a forward facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible up to the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat All children whose weight or height is above the forward facing limit for the child seat should use a belt positioning booster seat until the vehicle s seat belts fit properly If the child cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s seat cushion while the child s back is against the seatback they should use a belt positioning booster seat The child and belt positioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat belt WARNING Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant or child restraint It could come loose in a collision The child could be badly injured or killed Follow the child restraint manufacturer s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat
238. hildren A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle e For personal security and safety in the event of an collision lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well as when you park and leave the vehicle Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and re move the Key Fob from the ignition When leaving CAUTION the vehicle always lock your vehicle e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Chil dren should be warned not to touch the parking A door lock switch is located on the driver and passenger brake brake pedal or the shift lever door panel Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Power Door Locks Continued THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer Please see your authorized dealer for service Auto Unlock On Exit aa The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en abled 2 The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
239. his engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to the Engine Com partment illustration in this section NOTE MOPAR SAE 5W 30 engine oil approved to Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as Pennzoil 7 Shell Helix or equivalent may be used when SAE 5W 20 engine oil meeting MS 6395 is not available 428 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed Materials Added To Engine Oil The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi tives Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced wit
240. his may cause the seat heater to overheat Sitting in a seat that has been overheated could cause serious burns due to the increased surface tempera Manual Seat Adjusting Bar ture of the seat 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or rear ward Release the bar once the seat is in the position desired Then using body pressure move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched WARNING Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster If Equipped A lever style height adjustment feature enhances comfort for petite as well as tall drivers A lever with a ratcheting mechanism located on the outboard side of the seat raises and lowers it Total travel is 2 2 in 56 mm 030933267 Seat Height Adjustment Lever es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 Reclining Seats WARNING The recline lever is located on the side of the seat To recline lean forward slightly before lifting the lever then lean back e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward dangerous The sudden movement of the seat could and lift the lever to re
241. hood 2 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector one quarter turn counterclockwise and remove it from the headlamp housing 3 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install the replacement bulb 4 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the headlamp housing and rotate the connector one quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place 468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Front Fog Lamp 3 Install the bulb and connector assembly into the fog lamp housing and rotate the connector one quarter NOTE Access to the lamps through the lower fascia turn clockwise to lock it in place cutout is limited We recommend you access the lamps by turning the steering wheel to allow access and remove Backup Lamps eunet Ae le 1 Open the trunk and gently pull back the trunk liner 1 Rotate the bulb s electrical connector one quarter turn behind the tail lamp requires removal of a push pin counterclockwise and remove it from the fog lamp holding the trunk trim in place near the tail lamp housing 2 Remove the two plastic wing nuts from the tail lamp 2 Remove the bulb from the connector socket and install housing the replacement bulb CAUTION Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life If the bulb comes in contact with an oily surface clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol 073310823 Tail Lamp Wing Nut NOTE Placing a small flat head screwdriver or similar tool betwe
242. hydroplaning never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the anti lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the Brake Warning Light is not on Continued 324 STARTING AND OPERATING Se If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti lock brakes If the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the Anti Lock Brake Warning Light remain on the Anti Lock Brake ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD Systems are not functioning Immediate repair to the ABS system is required See your authorized dealer When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road o
243. icle Security Alarm system Opening a door with the system activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Illuminated Approach If Equipped This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with EVIC For details refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information To Lock The Doors Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal Sound Horn With Lock This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter This feature can be turned on or off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information A oO N THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following steps Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans mitter for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds The
244. icle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshoot ing and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and mainte nance procedures as well as specifications capabilities and safety tips en F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 491 Call toll free at e 1 800 890 4038 U S e 1 800 387 1143 Canada Or Visit us on the Worldwide Web at e www techauthority com DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends up
245. id damage painted and vinyl surfaces care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447 NOTE No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission only the approved lubricant should be used CAUTION Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and or torque converter shudder and will require more frequent fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifica tions Special Additives The manufacturer strongly recommends against using any special additives in the transmission Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transmission The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks Avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as the chemicals can damage your transmission compo nents Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Fluid Level Check Four Speed Transmission Use the following procedure to check the transmission fluid level properly 1 Park the vehicle on level ground 448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Run t
246. ights On Key In Ignition Remote start aborted Door ajar es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227 e e e Remote start aborted Hood ajar Remote start aborted Trunk ajar Remote start aborted Fuel low Remote start disabled System fault Oil Change Required with a single chime Low Tire with a graphic of the car showing which tire s is are low with a single chime and Inflate to XX Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting and Operating Check TPM System with a single chime Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System in Starting and Operat gt H ing Oil Change Required If Equipped Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change indicator system The Oil Change Required message will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval The engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon your personal driving style Unless reset this message will continue to display each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position To turn off the message temporarily press and release the MENU button To reset the oil change indica tor system after performing the scheduled maintenance perform the following procedure 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position do not start the engine
247. il and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Eve button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The Uconnect Phone will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone network configurations This is normal 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Command button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Sve button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts ON OFF Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the Uconnect Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Press the w button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say one of the following Setup Confirmation Prompts On Setup Confirmation Prompts Off Phone And Network Status Indicators
248. ild seat Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat ing position E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87 5 If the child restraint has a tether strap connect it to the top tether anchorage See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for direc tions to attach a tether anchor 6 Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint manufac turer s instructions 7 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint stow all ALR seat belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints An unused belt could injure a child if they play 88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor Before installing a child restraint using the LATCH system buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of the child s reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of buckling it behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path an
249. impact bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls Occupant Restraint Controller ORC The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system required for this vehicle The ORC determines if deployment of the front and or side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required Based on the impact sensor s signals a central electronic ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags SABIC air bags Supplemental Seat Mounted Side Air Bags and front seat belt pretensioners as required depending on the severity and type of impact Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal collisions depending on several factors including the severity and type of collision Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear side or rollover collisions 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions including some that may produce sub stantial vehicle damage for example some pole colli sions truck underrides and angle offset collisions On the other hand depending on the type and location of impact Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes with little vehicle front end damage but that produce a severe initial deceleration The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions Side a
250. in fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the taining Your Vehicle for further information original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir Continued 446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued WARNING Continued To avoid contamination from foreign matter or Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate moisture use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly closed container Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the e air resulting in a lower boiling point This may Automatic Transmission cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro Selection Of Lubricant longed braking resulting in sudden brake failure This could result in a collision the brake fluid Brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure This could result in a collision It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in ensure optimum transmission performance and life Use spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts causing only the manufacturer s specified transmission fluid the brake fluid to catch fire Brake fluid can also Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid specifications It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level using the recommended flu
251. ing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle e Determine the condition of the road or the path that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water This will minimize wave effects Continued CAUTION Continued Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle s drivetrain components Always inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil trans mission axle etc for signs of contamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami nated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty ee STARTING AND OPERATING 319 POWER STEERING system This noise should be considered normal and it The standard power steering system will give you good does not in any way damage the steering system vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability CAUHON in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical CAUTION steering capability if power assist is lost Prolonged operation of the steering
252. ini oss Mini Cavity tridge Description Cavity tridge Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 12 20 Amp Spare 17 10 Amp Wireless Control Yellow Red Module WCM 13 20 Amp Ignition Cigar Clock Steering Yellow Lighter Control Module 14 10Amp Instrument Panel GEM Red 18 40 Amp Auto Shutdown 15 40Amp Radiator Fan Relay oe ASD Relay Green 19 20 Amp Audio Amplifier 16 15 Amp Sunroof If Yellow If Equipped Lt Blue Equipped 20 15 Amp Radio Lt Blue 21 10 Amp Siren If Equipped 460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M be Mini oss Mini Cavity tridge Description Cavity tridge Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 22 10 Amp Ignition Run Cli 27 10 Amp Ignition Run Oc Red mate Controls Hot Red cupant Classifica Cupholder If tion Module Equipped OCM Occupant 23 15 Amp Auto Shutdown Restraint Controller Lt Blue ASD Relay 3 ORC 24 25 Amp Sunroof If 28 10 Amp Ignition Run Natural Equipped Red Occupant Classifi iti tion Module 25 10 Amp Ignition Run ca Red Heated Mirrors If OCM Occupant Equipped Restraint Controller ORC 26 15 Amp Auto Shutdown 5 Hot Car No F Lt Blue ASD Relay 2 E ot Car No Fuse Required ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461 Powertrain Control Module PCM od Mini Pak Mini Cavity tridge Descript
253. ining correct tire inflation pressure is very important Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 345 loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat WARNING ing speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle WARNING High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your poorly The instability could cause a collision Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires tires could cause them to fail You could have a s ram serious collision Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Tire Repair maximum capacity at continuous speeds above Jf your tire becomes damaged it may be repaired if it 75 mph 120 km h meets the following criteria e The tire has not been driven on when flat The damage is only on the tread section of your tire sidewall damage is not repairable e The puncture is no greater than 1 4 6 mm 346 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information Damaged Run Flat tires or Run Flat tires that have experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme diately with another Run
254. ion Cavity tridge Description Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse 30 20 Amp Ignition Run 34 30 Amp Anti Lock Brakes Yellow Heated Seats If Pink ABS Module If Equipped Equipped x p pee Bu 32 30Amp Auto Shutdown ec f a Pink ASD Relay 1 x EX um Du M z mp i Lock Brakes m i Rap a Panke Green ABS Module If Red Diagnostic Link Equipped Connector Electronic Stability Control ESC Mod ule If Equipped 462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cavity tridge Fuse Description Fuse When installing the Integrated Power Module 36 30 Amp Passenger Door cover it is important to ensure the cover is properly Pink Module PDM positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may Driver Door Mod allow water to get into the Integrated Power Mod ule DDM ld and possibly result in an electrical system ailure d a a is Top e When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use SMS SESBES only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system overload If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463 VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT BULBS If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your Interior Bulbs battery Bulb Number e Dis
255. ipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed In addition to the vehicle manufacturer other parties such as law enforcement that have the special equip ment can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all times including babies and children Every state in the United States and every Canadian province requires that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years or younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front 74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child can become a projectile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s size There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat Owner s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child Before buying any restraint sy
256. ir bag deployment will depend on the severity and type of collision Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration over time vehicle speed and damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have deployed Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli sions and also are needed to help keep you in position away from an inflating air bag The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON RUN position If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate The ORC contains a backup power supply system that may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or it becomes disconnected prior to deployment e ry Also the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for approxi mately four to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial startup E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
257. ive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur For the recommended viscosity and quality grades refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Ve hicle CAUTION Never use Non Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may result ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95 NOTE A new engine may consume some oil during its WARNING Continued first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered a normal part of the break in and It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area not interpreted as an indication of difficulty inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously SAFETY TIPS injured or killed Tianspartina P Haers Do not allow people to ride in any area of your ansporting Fassenge vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CA
258. iving conditions ESC cor rects for over under steering of the vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counter acting the over under steer condition Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the desired path ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to deter mine the vehicle path intended by the driver and com pares it to the actual path of the vehicle When the actual path does not match the intended path ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition Over steer when the vehicle is turning more than appropriate for the steering wheel position Under steer when the vehicle is turning less than appropriate for the steering wheel position 328 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Electronic Stability Control ESC cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions ESC cannot prevent accidents including those resulting from excessive speed in turns driving on very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the condi tions Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan gerous manner which could jeopardize the use
259. k 3 Automatic Transmission Dipstick 7 Air Cleaner Filter 11 Washer Fluid Reservoir 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Fill 420 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 1 Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 Air Cleaner Filter 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 6 Engine Oil Dipstick 3 Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 Engine Oil Fill 4 Integrated Power Module Fuses 8 Washer Fluid Reservoir ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 421 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD Il Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as well as engine emis sions well within current government regulations If any of these systems require service the OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL It will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist your service technician in making repairs Al though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause further damage to the emission control system It could also affect fuel economy and driveability The vehicle must be serviced before any e
260. k cylinder and turn the key to the ON START position NOTE The driver s door key cylinder and the trunk button on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during trunk entry Pressing the trunk button will not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm If someone enters the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door the alarm will sound The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your vehicle however you can create conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will give you a false alarm If one of the previously described arming sequences has oc curred the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not If you remain in the vehicle and open a door the alarm will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery becomes disconnected the Vehicle Security Alarm will remain armed when the battery is reconnected The exterior lights will flash and the horn will sound If this occurs disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm Tamper Alert If the alarm was triggered but the warning signals have timed out the park and taillights flash three times and the horn will chirp three times when unlocking the vehicle with a valid RKE transmitter to alert the driver ILLUMINATED ENTRY IF EQUIPPED The courtesy lights
261. k or changing the wheel After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts bolts are properly seated Continuen against the wheel 396 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE WARNING Continued Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift e Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack The jack is designed to be used as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas Jack Location The jack and jack handle are stowed under the load floor in the trunk Spare Tire Stowage The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor in the trunk Spare Tire Removal Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down 060533067 Spare Tire And Jack Storage WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 397 Preparations For Jacking 5 Turn OFF the ignition 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or 6 Block both the front and rear of the slippery areas wheel diagonally opposite of the jacking position For example if WARNING 7 changing the right front tire block Do not at
262. knob will begin playing the files contained in that folder or the next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain playable files The folder list will time out after five seconds INFO Button CD Mode For MP3 Play Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if available Press the INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or more and the radio will display song titles for each file Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds to return to elapsed time display Operation Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an MP3 player or iPod and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil iary device if the AUX jack is connected ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259 NOTE The AUX device must be turned on and the device s volume set to the proper level If the AUX audio is not loud enough turn the device s volume up If the AUX audio sounds distorted turn the device s volume down TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds when the ig
263. l show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank 4 Speedometer Indicates the vehicle speed in miles per hour MPH and kilometers per hour km h 5 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level drops to approximately 2 0 gallons 7 6 Liters the fuel symbol will light and a single chime will sound NOTE This light will remain on until a minimum of approximately 3 0 gallons of fuel is added 6 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on briefly when the ignition is first turned on and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s electrical devices such as the Front Fog Lights or Rear Window Defroster If the Charging System Light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See your local authorized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 If jump starting is required refer to Jump Starting Procedures in What To Do In Emergencies 7 Air Bag Warning Light ry This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to ON RUN If the light is either not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Occupant Restraints in Things To Know Be
264. layed Selecting A Different Audio Device 1 Press the PHONE button to begin 2 After the Ready prompt and following the beep say Setup then say Select Audio Devices 3 Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect phone system to list the audio devices m Next Track Use the SEEK UP button or press the VR button on the radio and say Next Track to jump to the next music track on your cellular phone 270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Previous Track STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS IF Use the SEEK DOWN button or press the VR button on EQUIPPED the radio and say Previous Track to jump to the previous music track on your cellular phone Remote Sound System Controls Back View Of Steering Wheel Browse Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA device Only the current song that is playing will display info 045035585 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271 The remote sound system controls are located on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the three and nine o clock positions The right hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and mode of the sound system Pressing the top of the rocker switch will increase the volume Pressing the bottom of the rocker switch will decrease the volume Pressing the center button changes the operation of the radio from AM to FM or to CD mode depending on which radio is i
265. ld result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward seat belt Push the seat switch forward or rearward the seat will Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the move in the direction of the switch Release the switch shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest when the desired position has been reached In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death Adjusting The Beat Up Or Down The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down Pull upward or push downward on the seat switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired position is reached ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 Tilting The Seat Up Or Down WARNING The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four directions Pull upward or push downward on the front or rear of the seat switch the front or rear of the seat cushion will move in the direction of the switch Release the switch when the desired po
266. le s audio system Play Mode When switched to iPod USB MP3 control mode the iPod or external USB device automatically starts Play mode In Play mode the following buttons on the radio faceplate may be used to control the iPod or external USB device and display data e Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or previous track e Turning it clockwise forward by one click while playing a track skips to the next track or press the VR button and say Next Track Turning it counterclockwise backward by one click will jump to the previous track in the list or press the VR button and say Previous Track e Jump backward in the current track by pressing and holding the RW button Holding the RW button long enough will jump to the beginning of the current track Jump forward in the current track by pressing and holding the FF gt gt button 266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ses e e e A single press backward lt lt RW or forward FF gt gt will jump backward or forward respectively for five sec onds Use the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons to jump to the previous or next track Pressing the SEEK gt gt button during play mode will jump to the next track in the list or press the VR button and say Next or Previous Track While a track is playing press the INFO button to see the associated metadata artist track title album etc for that track Pressi
267. le should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could have a collision Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with Anti Lock brakes ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON RUN position The light should illuminate for approximately three seconds The light should then turn 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON RUN posi tion NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 12 Tachometer The silver area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute RPM x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prev
268. led Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and doing so may cause the MIL to turn on A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling NOTE e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled Loose Filler Cap Message If the vehicles diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap in loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer reset button to turn off the message If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL off ee STARTING AND OPERATING 375 VEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
269. lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 035107277 L A Hood Release Lever Folding Rear Seat Armrest UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161 2 Then lift the secondary latch located under the front edge of the hood near the center and raise the hood 031337001 Prop Rod Location NOTE Before closing the hood make sure to stow the Hood Safety Latch Location prop rod in its proper location Use the hood prop rod to secure the hood in the open position Place the upper end of the prop rod in the hole on the left underside of the hood 031336999 162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION passing light fog lights instrument panel light dimming and turn signals The multifunction lever is located on To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to the left side of the steering column close it Use a firm downward push at the center of the hood to ensure that both latches engage WARNING Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your vehicle If the hood is not fully latched it could open when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision Failure to follow this warning could result in serious injury or death 031407547 LIGHTS Multifunction Lever Multifunction Lever The multifunction lever controls the operation of the parking lights headlights headlight beam selection UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163 He
270. lobally compat ible coolant antifreeze If a non OAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency the cooling system will need to be drained flushed and refilled with fresh OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 by an authorized dealer as soon as possible Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Maintaining Your Vehicle for further information Continued 440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and may plug the radiator e This vehicle has not been designed for use with propylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze Use of propylene glycol based engine coolant an tifreeze is not recommended Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine coolant OAT coolant conforming to MS 12106 that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine cool ant antifreeze can be used up to ten years or 150 000 miles 240 000 km before replacement To prevent reduc ing this extended maintenance period it is important that you use the same engine coolant OAT coolant conform ing to MS 12106 throughout the life of your vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Organic Additive Technology OAT engine coolant a
271. ltAlert has been deactivated the Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s or front passenger if equipped with BeltAlert seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts And Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Seat Belt Extender If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage if equipped is in its lowest position your authorized ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender This extender should be used only if the existing belt is not long enough When it is not required remove the ex tender and store it WARNING Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision Only use when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn low and snug and in the recommended seating positions Remove and store the extender when not needed Supplemental Restraint System SRS Air Bags This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the driver and front passenger as a suppl
272. luid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 2 to 5 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Shifting between the DRIVE and 3 ranges when the transmission is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive Six Speed Automatic Transmission 62TE If Equipped The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears The transmission shift lever has PARK REVERSE NEU TRAL DRIVE and AutoStick shift positions Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick shi
273. m will turn off the horn after three minutes turn off all of the visual signals after 15 minutes and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself To Arm The System 1 Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door lock switch one door must be open or the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter doors can be open or closed and close all doors NOTE The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the doors with the manual door lock plungers 3 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash for 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es or the power door locks are unlocked in any manner the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm NOTE During the 16 second arming period if a door is opened or the ignition switch is turned to ON RUN the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically disarm Once armed the Vehicle Security Alarm disables the unlock switch on the driver door trim panel and passenger door trim panel the trunk release button on the instrument panel and the HomeLink Garage Door Opener if equipped To Disarm The System Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter or insert a valid Sentry Key into the ignition loc
274. may be delayed to provide second gear operation at higher speeds Using the 3 range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions 304 STARTING AND OPERATING Se will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up The 3 range should also be used when descending steep grades to avoid brake system distress LOW L Use this range for engine braking when descending very steep grades In this range the transmission will down shift for maximum engine braking and upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illu minated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait approximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shif
275. mission can cause seri ous damage To prevent dirt and water from enter ing the transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make sure that the dipstick cap is re seated properly rized dealer immediately Severe transmission dam age may occur Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately 450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid And Filter Changes Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals In addition change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes contaminated with water etc or if the transmission is disassembled for any reason Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and
276. missions tests can be performed If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or improperly installed A gASCAP message will be dis played in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the trip odometer Reset button to turn off the message If the problem 422 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL Resolv ing the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration C nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing For states that require an Inspection and Mainte Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if yo
277. mpletely and continue to hold the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed Window Lockout Switch The window lockout switch on the driver s door allows you to disable the window control on the other doors To disable the window controls on the other doors press the window LOCK button To enable the window controls press the window control button again THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 021936672 AUTO Power Window Switch Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ses open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open then open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sun roof opening to minimize the buffeting TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE Use the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter to open the trunk from outside the vehicle From inside the vehicle the trunk lid can be released by pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel NOTE The shift lever must be in PARK for this button to operate To unlatch the trunk lid from o
278. mpt and the following beep say SMS Send or Send Message 3 You can either say the message you wish to send or say List Messages There are 20 preset messages To send a message press the vRbutton while the system is listing the message and say Send Uconnect Phone will prompt you to say the name or number of the person you wish to send the message to List of Preset Messages 1 Yes 2 No 3 Where are you 4 I need more direction 5 LOL 6 Why 7 I love you 8 Call me 9 Call me later 10 Thanks 11 See You in 15 minutes 12 Iam on my way 133 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 13 TIl be late 14 Are you there yet 15 Where are we meeting 16 Can this wait 17 Bye for now 18 When can we meet 19 Send number to call 20 Start without me Turn Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement ON OFF Turning the Voice Text Reply Incoming Announcement OFF will stop the system from announcing the new incoming messages e Press the button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Incoming Message Announcement you will then be given a choice to change it Bluetooth amp Communication Link Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the Uconnect amp Phone When this happens the connection can generally be reestablished by switching the phone off on Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power
279. multifunction lever toward you This will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is released NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the flash to pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next flash to pass operation Fog Lights If Equipped 0 The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the multifunction lever 031407550 Front Fog Light Operation NOTE The front fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the front fog lights ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The front turn signal lamps will turn on as Daytime Running Lights DRL whenever the ignition is ON the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is released and the shift lever is in any position except PARK NOTE The Daytime Running Lights will flash when a turn signal is in operation and return to DRL mode when the turn signal is not operating Instrument Panel Dimmer Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a door is opened Rotate the center portion of the lever up to incr
280. n Poor engine performance Poor cold start and cold drivability Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following Drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer Change the engine oil and oil filter 366 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase octane Gasoline blended with MMT provides no performance advantage beyond gasoline of the same octane number without MMT Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and reduces emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recommends that gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle The MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump therefore you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline Materials Added To Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and they would result in additional cost Therefore you should n
281. n press the PANIC button while still holding the LOCK button Release both buttons at the same time Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es NOTE If there is no key in the ignition switch pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm Opening a door with the alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm To Unlatch The Trunk Press the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times to unlatch the trunk Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights turn on the park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the Illuminated Entry system if equipped will turn on The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE You may need to be close to the vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the Panic Alarm due to the Radio Frequency RF noises
282. n twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 Satellite stations Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle iPod USB MP3 CONTROL IF EQUIPPED This feature allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the USB port located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls iPod control supports Mini 4G Photo Nano 5G iPod and iPhone devices Some iPod software versions may not fully support the iPod control features Please visit Apple s website for software updates NOTE e If the radio has a USB port refer to the appropriate Uconnect Multimedia radio User s Manual for iPod or external USB device support capability Connecting an iPod or consumer electronic audio device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate plays media but does not use the iPod MP3 control feature to control the connected device 264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Connecting The iPod Or External USB Device Use the connection cable to connect an iPod or external USB device to the vehicle s USB connector port which is located in the center of the instrument panel below the climate controls 044136678 USB Connector
283. n event the ignition switch must be changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF If A Deployment Occurs The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate immediately after deployment NOTE Front and or side air bags will not deploy in all collisions This does not mean something is wrong with the air bag system 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s in structions for cleaning If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags any or all of the following may occur The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de ployed If you are involved in another collision the air bags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the air bags seat belt pretensioners and the front seat belt re
284. n number will display Buttons 1 6 These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM and 12 FM stations DISC AUX Button Pressing the DISC AUX button will allow you to switch from AM FM modes to DISC AUX mode Operation Instructions CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio Play NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio This radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display If a CD does not go into the slot more than 1 0 in 2 5 cm a disc may already be loaded and must be ejected before a new disc can be loaded If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION e This CD player will accept 4 3 4 in 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism Do not use adhesive labels These labels c
285. n of 50 OAT Organic Additive Technology 284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 and 50 water is recommended Refer to Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle for proper coolant selection Winter Operation Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months is not recommended because it may cause window fogging Vacation Storage Anytime you store your vehicle or keep it out of service i e vacation for two weeks or more run the air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the fresh air and high blower settings This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of compressor damage when the system is started again Window Fogging Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost The Mix mode can be used to maintain a clear windshield and provide sufficient heating If side window fogging be comes a problem increase blower speed Vehicle win dows tend to fog on the inside in mild but rainy or humid weather NOTE Recirculate without A C should not be used for long periods as fogging may occur Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is located at each end of the instrument panel These non adjustable outlets direct air toward the side windows when the system is in the FLOOR MIX or DEFROST mode The air is directed
286. n on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors if equipped An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap proximately 10 minutes For an additional five minutes of operation press the button a second time NOTE To prevent excessive battery drain use the rear window defroster only when the engine is operating ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201 CAUTION Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to the heating elements e Use care when washing the inside of the rear window Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Use a soft cloth and a mild washing solution wiping parallel to the heating elements Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water Do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window Keep all objects a safe distance from the window UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS E INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES 206 EVIC Main Menu ssi crsssrerieri rintaa 228 M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ssssssse 207 Compass Display 0000 ll INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS 208 Average Fuel Economy Bl MINI TRIP COMPUTER IF EQUIPPED 222 Distance To Empty DTE
287. n or off 045669104 The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control knob on the right to one of the following positions e Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow NOTE Thecenter instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers for maximum airflow to the rear Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE For all settings except full cold or full hot there is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets The warmer air flows to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281 e Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets with a small amount flowing through the defrost and side window demist outlets e Mix Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield e Defrost ov Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum blower and temperature settings for best wind shield and side window defrosting 282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANE
288. n the vehicle The left hand rocker switch has a pushbutton in the center The function of the left hand switch is different depending on which mode you are in The following describes the left hand rocker switch op eration in each mode Radio Operation Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch will SEEK down for the next listenable station The button located in the center of the left hand switch will tune to the next preset station that you have pro grammed in the radio preset pushbutton CD Player Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next track on the CD Pressing the bottom of the switch once will go to the beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the previous track if it is within one second after the current track begins to play If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the second track three times it will play the third etc The button in the center of the left hand switch has no function in this mode 272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se CD DVD DISC MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as ben
289. n use Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH one for LOW and none for OFF Press the switch once to select HIGH level heating Press the switch a second time to select LOW level heating Press the switch a third time to shut the heating elements OFF NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes When the HIGH level setting is selected the heater will provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of operation Then the heat output will drop to the normal HIGH level If the HIGH level setting is selected the sys tem will automatically switch to LOW level after approxi mately 30 minutes of continuous operation At that time the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two to one ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 indicating the change The LOW level setting will tum OFF Manual Front Seat Adjustment automatically after approximately 30 minutes WARNING The manual seat adjustment bar is at the front of the seat near the floor Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion T
290. nd luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 Ibs 295 kg since 5 x 150 Ibs 68 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg and 1400 lbs 635 kg 750 Ibs 340 kg 650 Ibs 295 kg Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4 340 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs f your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your 392 kg trailer will be transferred to your vehicle The follow ing table shows examples on how to calculate total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and num ber and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard 865 Ibs 865 Ibs MINUS minus minus Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 tbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs
291. nds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value ee STARTING AND OPERATING 363 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will General Information sound the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid and the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired op This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically In addition the raton 5 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a new following licenses pressure value instead of dashes as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in United States KR5 18002015B any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need Canada 267T S180015B to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
292. ng mounted lower attach ments can be installed in any rear seating position WARNING 1 If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more matic Locking Retractor ALR seat belt stow the seat than one child restraint If you are installing LATCH belt following the instructions below See the section compatible child restraints next to each other you Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat must use the seat belt for the center position You can Belt to check what type of seat belt each seating then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle s position has Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu facturer when installing your child restraint Not all child restraint systems will be installed as described here To Install A LATCH compatible Child Restraint Continued 2 Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for that seating position For some second row seats you may need to recline the seat and or raise the head restraint to get a better fit If the rear seat can be moved forward and rearward in the vehicle you may wish to move it to its rear most position to make room for the child seat You may also move the front seat forward to allow more room for the ch
293. ng the INFO button again jumps to the next screen of data for that track Once all screens have been viewed the last INFO button press will go back to the play mode screen on the radio Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio device mode to repeat the current playing track or press the VR button and say Repeat ON or Repeat Off Press the SCAN button to use iPod USB MP3 de vice scan mode which will play the first ten seconds of each track in the current list and then forward to the next song To stop SCAN mode and start playing the desired track when it is playing the track press the SCAN button again During Scan mode pressing the lt lt SEEK and SEEK gt gt buttons will select the previous and next tracks RND button available on sales code RES radio only Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod or external USB device or press the VR button and say Shuffle ON or Shuffle Off If the RND icon is showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is ON es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267 List Or Browse Mode During all List modes the iPod displays all lists in wrap around mode So if the track is at the bottom of the list just turn the wheel backward counterclock wise to get to the track faster During Play mode pressing any of the buttons described below will bring up List mode List mode enables scrolling through the list of menus and
294. ng your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including removal or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify the air bag system for persons with dis abilities contact your authorized dealer 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se Air Bag Warning Light You will want to have the air bags ready to inflate for your protection in a collision The Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with air bag system electrical components While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance free if any of the following occurs have an authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately e ry The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned to the ON RUN position e The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to eight second interval The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving NOTE If the speedometer tachometer or any engine related gauges are not working the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC may also be disabled The air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection Promptly check the fuse block for blown fuses Refer to the label located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the p
295. ngine from starting e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will degrade the bat tery even more quickly Only use these intermit tently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery 194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER IF EQUIPPED An optional ash receiver is available from your autho rized dealer and will fit in the center console front cupholder The optional ash receiver also comes with a cigar lighter that can be used with the power outlets Refer to Power Outlets in Understanding The Features Of Your Ve hicle for further information CUPHOLDERS Front Seat Cupholders The cupholders in the center console will accommodate either two large size cups or two 20 oz 5 L bottles or cans The one peice insert can be easily removed for cleaning An optional removable ashtray may be located in one of the cupholders 035137633 Front Cupholders Rear Cupholders The rear seat cupholders are located in the armrest between the rear seats Pull down the armrest to use the cupholders UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195 Rear Cupholders Rear Bottle Holder Rear Seat Bottle Holder WARNING
296. nificant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will display Tire PSI Press and release the MENU button until Tire PSI is displayed Tire pressure information is displayed as follows e If tire pressure is OK for all tires TIRE and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each corner or the graphic If one or more tires have low pressure LOW TIRE Inflate to XX and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire pressure values in each corner of the graphic Tire pressure values that are too low will be flashing If the Tire Pressure System requires service Check TPM System is displayed Tire PSI is an information only function and cannot be reset ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233 Elapsed Time Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the RUN or START position Elapsed time is displayed as follows e Hours Minutes e Seconds Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the SELECT button as prompted in the EVIC display Upon reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or START EVIC Units Selection UNITS IN Display Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature Average Fuel Economy Distance to Empty and Tire Pressure features Press and Release the SELECT button to toggle unit
297. nimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know your vehicle the best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealer have the 486 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE ME facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer They want to know if you need assistance If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con cern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealer name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler Group LLC C
298. nings replace X X X Ie as necessary Adjust parking brake as necessary X X X X X X es MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 479 Jj A Mileage or time passed o o o o e o o o ge e 2 2 2 2 l whichever comes first s8 8s s s s 8s 8 8 S S S S S S N amp 8 9 8 8 8 S8 8 9 2 a a2 e 8 i Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 gsggsgs52s282g285sgb S FS 3 S 2 8 3 8 85 9 S8 8 S B Additional Maintenance S Replace engine air filter X X X e TER m H Replace cabin air conditioning X X X X X X E filter B Replace spark plugs U 2 4L Engine X x E xX n Replace spark plugs X E 2 4L PZEV Engine Only 8 Replace spark plugs X 3 6L Engine L 480 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Sx A Mileage or time passed o o eo e o e o o e 2 Ss 2 2 2 N whichever comes firs 9 8 8 8S 8 8 8 8 2 S S m3 l IS S2 2 S 8 9S Sle Bi s 8 E r T T Or Years 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 i E e e e e e e e e N Or Kometo 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 28 8 8 8 T 5 y y N q e e N ceo e E S e S SEI 2 2 8 2 8 es Ey Flush and replace the engine fey coolant at 10 years or 150 000 X X i28 miles 240 000 km whichever Iz comes first i Change automatic transmission L fluid and filter if using your ve faa hicle for any of the following po X fy lice taxi fleet or
299. nition is OFF Uconnect Satellite Radio If Equipped Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 130 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios NOTE Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has limited coverage in Alaska System Activation Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre activated and you may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio service that is included with the factory installed satellite radio system in your vehicle Sirius will supply a wel come kit that contains general information including how to setup your on line listening account For further information call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at wwwssirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Canadian residents 260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID Please have the following information available when calling 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Your Vehicle Identification Number To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With the ignition switch in the ON RUN or ACC posi tion and the radio on press the SETUP
300. ns Uconnect Phone w button and Voice Com mand amp VRbutton that will enable you to access the system When you press the button you will hear the word Uconnect followed by a BEEP The beep is your signal to give a command 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Voice Command Button 4 VR The Uconnect Phone can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth mobile phone See the Uconnect website for supported phones Refer to your mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for details Actual button location may vary with the ra dio The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the Uconnect Phone such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect Phone menu structure Voice commands are required after most Uconnect Phone prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt For certain o
301. ntifreeze that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 When adding engine coolant antifreeze e We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 12106 Mix a minimum solution of 50 OAT engine coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan dard MS 12106 and distilled water Use higher concen trations not to exceed 7076 if temperatures below 34 F 37 C are anticipated ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441 e Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion ized water when mixing the water engine coolant antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling system Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE e Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types is not recom mended and can result in cooling system damage If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency have a authorized dealer dr
302. ntry Key Immobilizer System prevents unau thorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine The system does not need to be armed or activated Operation is automatic regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked The system uses ignition keys which have an embedded electronic chip transponder to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation Therefore only keys that are pro grammed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The system will shut the engine off in two seconds if someone uses an invalid key to start the engine 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME NOTE A key which has not been programmed is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle During normal operation after turning on the ignition switch the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check If the light remains on after the bulb check it indicates that there is a problem with the electronics In addition if the light begins to flash after the bulb check it indicates that someone used an invalid key to start the engine Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal vehicle operation vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds it indicates that there is a fault in the electron ics Should this occur have the vehicle serviced as soon as possi
303. o check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and only when the engine is hot will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the range markings on the dipstick Either the range mark ings consist of a crosshatch zone marked SAFE or a crosshatch zone marked with MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the range Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the low end of the range marking will raise the oil level to the high end of fy the range marking 426 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not overfill the engine Overfilling the engine will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine Also be sure the oil fill cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil Change Engine Oil The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for further informa tion NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 10 000 miles 16 000 km or twelve months whichever occurs first Engine Oil Selection For
304. o not overfill After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube wait at least two minutes for the oil to fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the fluid level 8 Check for leaks Release the parking brake ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449 To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission Fluid Level Check Six Speed Transmission after checking or replenishing fluid make sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require adjustment under normal operating conditions CAUTION Routine fluid level checks are not required therefore the transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is pro e Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac vided Your authorized dealer can check your transmission turer s recommended fluid may cause deterioration fluid level using a special service dipstick If you notice in transmission shift quality and or torque con fluid leakage or transmission malfunction visit your autho verter shudder and will require more frequent rized dealer immediately to have the transmission fluid fluid and filter changes Refer to Fluids Lubri level checked Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid cants and Genuine Parts in this section for fluid level can cause severe transmission damage CAUTION If a transmission fluid leak occurs visit your autho specifications Dirt and water in the trans
305. ode located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 03 means the 3rd week 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 336 STARTING AND OPERATING x Tire Terminology And Definitions Term Definition B Pillar The vehicle B Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after sitting for a three hour period In flation pressure is measured in units of PSI pounds per square inch or kPa kilopascals Maximum Inflation Pressure The maxim
306. of each warm season This service should include cleaning battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts and free of corrosion e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables be fore connecting the charger to the battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 431 of the condenser fins and a performance test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this time CAUTION Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning WARNING Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other oaks unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the R 134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Warranty Information Book located on the DVD Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How for further warranty information ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning The air conditioning system contains refrigerant Service be performed by authorized dealer or other under high pressure To avoid risk of personal service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant NOTE Use only manufacturer a
307. of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h For speeds above 75 mph 120 km h refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading and cold tire inflation pressures While studded tires improve performance on ice skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non studded tires Some states pro hibit studded tires therefore local laws should be checked before using these tire types Run Flat Tires If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles 80 km at 50 mph 80 km h after a rapid loss of inflation pressure This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is of or below 14 psi 96 kPa Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi ately A Run Flat tire is not repairable It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat mode See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor mation 348 STARTING AND OPERATING Se Spare Tires If Equipped NOTE For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a spare tire please refer to TIREFIT KIT in What To Do In
308. olume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played SEEK Buttons Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next listenable station in AM FM mode Press the right switch NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC to seek up and the left switch to seek down The radio position to operate the radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make 042340030 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME another selection Holding either button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it Voice Command System Radio If Equipped Refer to Voice Command in Understanding The Fea tures Of Your Vehicle Voice Command Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate the Uconnect Phone feature if equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone in Under standing The Features Of Your Vehicle If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not available on your vehicle a Not Equipped With Uconnect Phone message will display on the radio screen Phone Button Uconnect Phone If Equipped Press this button to operate th
309. on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being performed The suggested rotation method is the rearward cross shown in the following diagram This rotation pattern does not apply to some directional tires that must not be reversed EJ ES a S 055707139 Tire Rotation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 355 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom mended cold placard pressure The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 6 5 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pressure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to Tires General Information in Starting and Operating for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressur
310. on on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the UNLOCK button while still holding the LOCK button A 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Flash Lights With Lock The feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit ter This feature can be turned on or turned off To change the current setting proceed as follows For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the following procedure A Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds but not longer than 10 seconds Then press and hold the LOCK button while still holding the UNLOCK button 2 Release both buttons at the same time 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to its previous setting NOTE If there is no key in the ignition switch pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Veh
311. on the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 492 WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temper
312. on until U S or METRIC appears Compass Variance Refer to Compass Display for more information Calibrate Compass Refer to Compass Display for more information SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock located at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button in until the setting is correct The clock will adjust slowly at first and then quicker the longer the button is held EE Setting The Analog Clock UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237 Uconnect 730N 430 430N CD DVD HDD NAV Uconnect 130 IF EQUIPPED Refer to your Uconnect Supplement Manual for de tailed operating instructions Operating Instructions Voice Command System If Equipped Refer to Voice Command for further details Operating Instructions Uconnect Phone If Equipped Refer to Uconnect Phone for further details 042305232 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio 238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Push the ON VOLUME control knob to turn on the radio Push the ON VOLUME control knob a second time to turn off the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the ON VOLUME control knob to the right increas
313. onnect Phone Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the Uconnect Phone mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Sve button for five seconds until the session begins or 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e Press the Sve button and say the Voice Training System Training or Start Voice Training com mand You can either press the Uconnect Phone button to restore the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the Uconnect Phone For best results the Voice Training session should be com pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched off This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only Reset e Press the w button e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup then Reset This will delete all phone pairing phone book entries and other settings in all language modes The System will prompt you before resetting to factory settings Voice Command For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least inch 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror e Always wait for the beep before speaking e Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a fe
314. or 105 Uconnect Phone Features 122 Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped 106 Advanced Phone Connectivity 127 Power Mirrors x died pad be ed aoe Rea 107 Things You Should Know About Your Adjusting Side View Mirrors 108 PA ee MONE vga qanusqiued meal ees ui Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature 109 DOEDSIR ONAN paging retention es ta Heated Mirrors If Equipped 109 M VOE COMMAND m ny ene one EM Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 109 O Voice Command System Operation 140 E Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED 110 SODIUM qxteeufiqdesdieeMimtstagdesas id Operation iissss e 112 MOK RANE Cire ius eee teen ne 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se B SEATS coexesedtocem4 eee ne Exe aes 146 M LIGHTS aae E RR RI RR et et 162 Power Seats If Equipped 147 Multifunction Lever llle 162 Heated Seats If Equipped 150 Headlights And Parking Lights 163 Manual Front Seat Adjustment 151 Automatic Headlights If Equipped 163 Driver Seat Manual Height Adjuster If Headlights With Wipers Available With Equipped 2 sca RR ge 152 Automatic Headlights Only 164 Reclining Seats kx er Eee 153 Headlight Time Dela
315. or or twice to unlock all doors The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal The Illuminated Entry system if equipped will also turn on E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 Remote Key Unlock Driver Door All Doors First 2 Release both buttons at the same time di 3 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press This feature lets you program the system to unlock either ing the LOCK UNLOCK buttons on the RKE trans the driver s door or all doors on the first press of the mitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter To change the key removed current setting proceed as follows 4 Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle its previous setting Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understand ing Your Instrument Panel for further information NOTE If there is no key in the ignition switch pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Opening a door with the system activated will For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC perform the cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to following procedure deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm system Press and hold the LOCK butt
316. or call 1 800 465 2001 English or 1 800 387 9983 French Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls between the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 The Uconnect Phone is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free Profile mobile phone Uconnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so Uconnect Phone works no matter where you stow your mobile phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s Uconnect Phone The Uconnect Phone allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired mobile phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages WARNING Any voice commanded system should be used only in safe driving conditions following all applicable Continued WARNING Continued laws including laws regarding phone use Your at tention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle Failure to do so may result in a collision causing serious injury or death Uconnect Phone Button The radio or steering wheel controls if Ro equipped will contain the two control butto
317. or more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you Continued 368 STARTING AND OPERATING WARNING Continued Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main tenance Have the exhaust system inspected every time the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open FLEXIBLE FUEL 3 6L ENGINE ONLY IF EQUIPPED E 85 General Information 056502429 The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve E 85 Fuel Cap hicles only These vehicles can be identified by a unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol E 85 or Un leaded Gasoline Only This section only covers those subjects that are unique to these vehicles Please refer to the other sections of this manual for information on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and gasoline only powered vehicles STARTING AND OPERATING 369 WARNING Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could cause serious personal injury Never have any smok ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov ing the fuel filler tube cap gas cap or filling the tank Do not use E 85 as a cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame 85 ETHANOL Fuel Requirements ram 056502433 lf y
318. or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slippery GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motor ized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt battery 034033576 HomeLink Buttons Overhead Consoles ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179 034000355 HomeLink Buttons Sunvisor Headliner NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu rity Alarm is active Before You Begin Programming HomeLink Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage before you begin programming For more efficient programming and accurate transmis sion of the radio frequency signal it is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink system Erase all channels before you begin programming To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON RUN position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons I and III for up 20 seconds or until the red indicator flashes NOTE e Erasing all channels should only be performed when programming HomeLink for the first time Do not erase channels when programming additional buttons If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information
319. or the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size Continued 220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME CAUTION Continued equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 26 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL LS The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors emissions engine and automatic trans mission control systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON RUN position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from LOCK to ON RUN have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the light after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing CAUTION Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system It also could affect fuel economy and driveability If the MIL is fla
320. orized dealer immediately for assistance AutoStick e When using the AutoStick shift control select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids frequent downshifts For example choose 4 if the desired speed can be maintained Choose 3 or 2 if needed to maintain the desired speed To prevent excess heat generation avoid continuous driving at high RPM Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid extended driving at high RPM Return to a higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow Electronic Speed Control If Equipped Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency ee STARTING AND OPERATING 389 Cooling System Highway Driving To reduce potential for engine and transmission over Reduce speed heating take the following actions AiriConditioning ne Turn off temporarily When stopped for short periods of time shift the trans mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground All Models Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Dolly Tow Front OK Rear NOT ALLOWED On Trailer ALL OK
321. orm a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed Maintenance Schedule there are other components which may require servicing or replacement in the future CAUTION e Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per form repairs and service when necessary could result in more costly repairs damage to other components or negatively impact vehicle perfor mance Immediately have potential malfunctions examined by an authorized dealer or qualified repair center Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 425 CAUTION Continued Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that protect the performance and durability of your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter vals Do not use chemical flushes in these compo nents as the chemicals can damage your engine transmission power steering or air conditioning Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty If a flush is needed because of component malfunction use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time t
322. orward facing child restraint Can a child seat be installed in the center Yes You can install child restraints with flexible position using the inner LATCH lower an lower anchors in the center position The chorages inner anchorages are 15 4 inches 392 mm apart Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83 Can two child restraints be attached using a common lower LATCH anchorage No Never share a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints If the center posi tion does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an out board position Can the rear facing child restraint touch the back of the front passenger seat Yes The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact See your child restraint owner s manual for more in formation Can the head restraints be removed 84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Locating The LATCH Anchorages The lower anchorages are round bars that are e found at the rear of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback below the anchorage sym bols on the seatback They are just visible when you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint You will easily feel
323. ot have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions CAUTION Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s performance e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance and damage the emissions control system Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 367 CAUTION Continued e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser vice Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentrations of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor mance problems resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the manufacturer Carbon Monoxide Warnings WARNING Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill Never run the engine in a closed area such as a garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running for an extended period If the vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine running f
324. otated to the off position after the ignition switch is turned OFF Only the headlights will illuminate during this time Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165 Turn Signals NOTE If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the indicator bulb is defective Lane Change Assist 3 Tap the lever up or down once without moving beyond the detent and the turn signal right or left will flash three times then automatically turn off Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights High Low Beam Switch Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam 031407551 Turn Signal Control 166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Flash To Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the
325. other infor mation about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans port Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1 800 333 0510 or go to http www tc gc ca roadsafety 490 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor mation that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintain ing servicing and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve hicles A complete working knowledge of the vehicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams charts and detailed illustrations These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled veh
326. our vehicle is E 85 compatible it will operate on unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87 or E 85 E 385 Badge fuel or any mixture of these two fuels Ethanol Fuel E 85 E 85 is a mixture of approximately 85 fuel ethanol and 15 unleaded gasoline 370 STARTING AND OPERATING Se For best results a refueling pattern that avoids alternat ing between E 85 and unleaded gasoline is recom mended When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that e You do not add less than 5 gallons 19 Liters when refueling You drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at least 5 miles 8 km Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard starting and or significant deterioration in driveability during warm up NOTE e Use seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel ASTM D5798 With non seasonally adjusted E 85 fuel you may experience hard starting and rough idle following start up even if the above recommendations are followed especially when the ambient temperature is below 32 F 0 C e Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully compatible with E 85 and may form deposits in your engine To eliminate driveability issues that may be caused by these deposits a supplemental gasoline additive such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron may be used Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles E 85 And Gasoline Vehicles FFV vehicles operated on E 85 require specially formu lated engine oils Th
327. ow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost Attempting to use the recircu lation while in Defrost will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn off es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283 e Most of the time when in Automatic Operation you Blower Control can temporarily put the system into Recirculation Mode by pressing the Recirculation button However under certain conditions while in Automatic Mode the system is blowing air out the defrost vents When these conditions are present and the Recirculation button is pressed the indicator will flash and then turn off This tells you that you are unable to go into 045607536 Recirculation Mode at this time If you would like the system to go into Recirculation Mode you must first Operating Tips move the Mode knob to Panel Mix and then press the NOTE Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Recirculation button This feature reduces the possibil suggested control settings for various weather condi ity of window fogging fons For full automatic operation or for automatic blower operation turn the blower knob to the AUTO position In manual mode there are seven blower speeds that can be individual selected In off position the blower will shut off a Summer Operation The engine cooling system must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro sion protection and to protect against engine overheating A solutio
328. ow your fingers other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Opening Sunroof Express Press the switch rearward and release it within one half second The sunroof and sunshade will open automati cally from any position The sunroof and sunshade will open fully and stop automatically This is called Express Open During Express Open operation any movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof Opening Sunroof Manual Mode To open the sunroof press and hold the switch rearward to full open Any release of the switch will stop the movement The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward again Closing Sunroof Express Press the switch forward and release it within one half second and the sunroof will close automatically from any ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189 position The sunroof will close fully and stop automati cally This is called Express Close During Express Close operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Closing Sunroof Manual Mode To close the sunroof press and hold the switch in the forward position Any release of the switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition until the switch is pushed and held forward again Pinch Protect Feature This feature will detect an obstruction in the o
329. ownward into the vehicle seat 92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 8 If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the seating position has a top tether anchorage connect the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether strap See the section Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage for directions to attach a tether anchor 9 Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt path It should not move more than 1 inch 25 4 mm in any direction Any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether Anchorage tether anchorage You may need to move the seat forward to provide better access to the tether anchorage If there is no top tether anchorage for that seating position move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is available 1 Look behind the seating position where you plan to install the child restraint to find the 2 Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint 3 Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head restraints raise the head restraint and where possible route the tether strap under the head rest
330. pect the com plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken damaged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change Replace as required Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97 Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Air Bag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the igni tion switch is first turned ON If the light is not lit during starting see your authorized dealer If the light stays on flickers or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer oe ry Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield See your authorized dealer for service if your defro
331. pening of the sunroof during Express Close operation If an ob struction in the path of the sunroof is detected the sunroof will automatically retract Remove the obstruc tion if this occurs Next press the switch forward and release to Express Close NOTE If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals the fourth close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled Venting Sunroof Express Press and release the Vent button within one half second and the sunroof will open to the vent position This is called Express Vent and it will occur regardless of sunroof position During Express Vent operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof Sunshade Operation The sunshade can be opened manually However the sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens NOTE The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open 190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adju
332. perations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Pair a Device the following compound command can be said Pair a Bluetooth Device For each feature explanation in this section only the compound form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the compound form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the compound form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the Uconnect Phone works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The Uconnect Phone will play some of the options at any prompt if you ask for help To activate the Uconnect Phone simply press the Xe button and follow the audible prompts for directions Uconnect Phone sessions begin with a press of the amp e button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the
333. pproved A C system or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected PAG compressor oil and refrigerants should be done by an experienced technician system as the chemicals can damage your air condi tioning components Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling 432 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M A C Air Filter If Equipped Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Do not remove the A C air filter while the blower is operating or personal injury may result The A C Air Filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind the glove box Perform the following procedure to re place the filter 1 Open the glove box and remove all contents 2 Push in on the sides of the glove box and lower the door 3 Disconnect the glove box door dampener from the slot on the side of the box This is done by grasping the dampener connector on the outside of the box and the end of the connector pin on the inside of the box with your thumb and forefinger and pulling outward while lightly lifting upward on the door with your other hand Once disconnected the dampener will retract under neath the instrument panel if you release it 4 Pivot the glove box downward 5 Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter cover to the HVAC housing and remove the cover MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 433 7 Install the A C Air Filt
334. quipment If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 1 A weak battery in the transmitter The expected life of the battery is a minimum of three years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter and some mobile or CB radios REMOTE START SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry x2 RKE transmitter to start the engine conve niently from outside the vehicle while still maintaining security The system has a range of approximately 300 ft 91 m NOTE The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start How To Use Remote Start All of the following conditions must be met before the engine will remote start e Shift lever in PARK Doors closed e Hood closed e Trunk closed e Hazard switch off Brake switch inactive brake pedal not pressed Ignition key removed from ignition switch Battery at an acceptable charge level e RKE PANIC button not pressed E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 e System not disabled from previous remote start event Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle Vehicle Security Alarm not active poration Center BV IGpoi Equipped WARNING vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema The following messages will display in the EVIC if the 2 turely Do not start or run an engine in a closed gar
335. r s safety or the safety of others ESC Operating Modes The ESC system has two available operating modes Full On This is the normal operating mode for ESC Whenever the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this mode This mode should be used for almost all driving situa tions ESC should only be turned to Partial Off for specific reasons as noted below Partial Off This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the ESC Off switch located in the lower switch bank below the heater air conditioning controls When in Partial Off mode the TCS portion of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will be illuminated All other stability features of ESC function normally with the exception of engine power reduction This mode is STARTING AND OPERATING 329 intended to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow sand To turn ESC on again momentarily press the ESC Off or gravel conditions and more wheel spin than ESC switch This will restore the normal ESC On mode of would normally allow is required to gain traction operation WARNING When in Partial Off mode the TCS functionality of ESC except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section has been disabled and the ESC Off Indicator Light will be illuminated When in Par tial Off mode the engine power reduction of TCS is disabled
336. r stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into anti lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e The clicking sound of solenoid valves Brake pedal pulsations Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop These are all normal characteristics of ABS ee STARTING AND OPERATING 325 WARNING The Anti Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment This interfer ence can cause possible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic brake control system that includes Anti Lock Brake Sys tem ABS Traction Control System TCS Brake Assist System BAS and Electronic Stability Control ESC All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions and are commonly referred to as ESC Anti Lock Brake System ABS This system aid
337. r Engines the coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the engine coolant antifreeze level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ADD and FULL lines shown on the bottle Six Cylinder Engines the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the pressurized coolant bottle should be between the COLD and FULL range on the bottle when the engine is cold ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443 The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing cool ant Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When addi tional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points To Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles kilometers of operation you may observe vapor coming from the front of the engine compartment This is nor mally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartm
338. r leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle CAUTION An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves Always remove key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE The Key In Ignition reminder only sounds when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC position e With either front door open and the key in the ignition both the power door locks and Remote Key less Entry RKE transmitter will not function Locking The Doors With The Key There is only one external door lock cylinder which is located in the driver s door You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward To unlock the door turn the key forward For door lock lubrication see Maintenance Procedures in Maintaining Your Vehicle of this manual SENTRY KEY The Se
339. rade Apply the parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK The parking brake should always be applied whenever the driver is not in the vehicle WARNING e Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake Always apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle move ment and possible injury or damage e When leaving the vehicle always remove the Key Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle Continued 322 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued WARNING Continued Always fully apply the parking brake when leav ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or injury Also be certain to leave the transmission in PARK Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake brake pedal or the shift lever Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to children A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do
340. raint and THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93 between the two posts If not possible lower the head 4 Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram S ot IHE heod teat 5 Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer s instructions 2o WARNING e An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether strap e If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat make sure the tether strap does not slip into the opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in the strap Q 022632672 Tether Strap Mounting 1 Cover A Tether Strap Hook 3 Attaching Strap B Tether Anchor 94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Ss Transporting Pets Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine and drivetrain transmission and axle in your vehicle Dr
341. rd cycle Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500 Any engine warning lamps come on Low Fuel Light turns on The hood is opened The hazard switch is pressed The transmission is moved out of PARK The brake pedal is pressed ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The Vehicle Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle NOTE To avoid unintentional shut downs the system will disable the one time press of the Remote Start button for two seconds after receiving a valid remote start request To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle Before the end of the 15 minute cycle press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm if equipped Then insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the ON RUN position NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON RUN position in order to drive the vehicle DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks To lock each door push the door lock knob on each door a trim panel downward To unlock each door pull the inside door handle 021836669 Manual Lock Knob 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING Continued Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location accessible to c
342. required by received including interference that may cause unde Federal safety standards This includes most garage sired operation door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not Continued en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187 NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not ex pressly approved by the party responsible for compli ance could void the user s authority to operate the device e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci fications were met POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The sunroof controls are mounted between the dome Power Sunroof Switch reading lights 188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Never leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a location acces sible to children Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Ina collision there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passen gers are properly secured Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof Never all
343. ress the Sve button 127 Following the beep say Mute To un mute the Uconnect Phone e Press the Sve button Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect Phone paired mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice versa press the EVR button and say Transfer Call 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone Your mobile phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect amp Phone System follow the instructions de scribed in your mobile phone User s Manual List Paired Mobile Phone Names e Press the button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing e When prompted say List Phones The Uconnect Phone will play the phone names of all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To Select or Delete a paired phone being announced press the Sve button and say Se lect or Delete Also
344. ronic Stability Control ESC in this section of this manual Brake Assist System BAS The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle s braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers The system detects an emergency braking situation by sens ing the rate and amount of brake application and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes This can help reduce braking distances The BAS complements the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance To receive the benefit of the system you must apply continuous brak ing pressure during the stopping sequence Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer desired Once the brake pedal is released the BAS is deactivated ee STARTING AND OPERATING 327 WARNING The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded The BAS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydroplaning e The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Electronic Stability Control ESC This system enhances directional control and stability of the vehicle under various dr
345. roper air bag fuses See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good Event Data Recorder EDR This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder EDR The main purpose of an EDR is to record in certain crash or near crash like situations such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle data that will assist in understand ing how a vehicle s systems performed The EDR is de signed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time typically 30 seconds or less The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as How various systems in your vehicle were operating ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73 e Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled fastened e How far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or brake pedal and e How fast the vehicle was traveling These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur NOTE EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non trivial crash situation occurs no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per sonal data e g name gender age and crash location are recorded However other parties such as law en forcement could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation To read data recorded by an EDR special equ
346. roximately 10 seconds 5 Restart the engine 6 Shift into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 313 NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive sixth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e The shift lever is in the DRIVE position e The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera ture The vehicle speed is sufficiently high e The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages 314 STARTING AND OPERATING es NOTE The to
347. rque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm usually after 1 to 3 miles 2 to 5 km of driving Because the engine speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold This is normal Using the AutoStick shift control when the transmis sion is sufficiently warm will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED AutoStick is a driver interactive transmission feature providing manual shift control giving you more control of the vehicle AutoStick allows you to maximize en gine braking eliminate undesirable upshifts and down shifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation When the shift lever is in the AutoStick position below the DRIVE position it can be moved from side to side This allows the driver to manually select the transmission gear being used Moving the shift lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The current gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster In AutoStick mode the transmission will shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right or left unless an engine lug
348. rque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel JUMP STARTING If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster pack Jumpestarting can be dangerous if done improperly so please follow the procedures in this section carefully WARNING Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury 408 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES CAUTION Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery starter motor alternator or electrical system may occur NOTE When using a portable battery booster pack follow the manufacturer s operating instructions and precautions Preparations For Jump Start The battery in your vehicle is located between the left Remote Battery Posts front headlight assembly and the left front wheel splash 1 Remote Positive Post covered with protective cap shield To allow jump starting there are remote battery 2 _ Remote Negative Post posts located on the left side of the engine compartment WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 409 3 Remove the protective cover over the remote positive battery post To remove the cover press the locking Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when
349. rrors oseng reati saagis eee eee 105 Rear Window Defroster 0 000000 200 Rear Window Features 000000 c eee 200 Recorder Event Data 0 0 00 eee 72 Recreational Towing 000002 e eee 389 Reformulated Gasoline 0 0 00 000008 364 Refrigerants scum eens oa eae eae aed 431 Reminder Seat Belt 0 00002 ee eee 57 Remote Control Door Locks 2 2 deer Re area Rene 22 Remote Keyless Entry RKE 22 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 22 Remote Sound System Radio Controls 270 Remote Starting System 0 0 eee eee 28 Remote Trunk Release 000004 40 Replacement Bulbs 000000 463 Replacement Keys ies edit wwe RR acre 16 Replacement Parts llle 423 Replacement Tires llle 352 Reporting Safety Defects llle 489 Resetting Oil Change Indicator 214 Restraint Head 0 0 0 enaa ce es 154 Restraints Child 0 0 0 ikrai 73 Rotation Tires ie oua Aaa ux Cer 354 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 96 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 99 Safety Defects Reporting llle 489 Safety Exhaust Gas css sees e 95 Safety Information Tire sss a ts aneis a iaaii Ria 331 ee INDEX 507 Safety TIpSs ace deer ema e DERG dae es ad 95 Satellite Radio Antenna llle ln 260 Schedule Maintenance esee 476 Seat Belt
350. rs Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings Using tire chains on the vehicle Using wheels tires not equipped with TPM sensors 1 The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a tire pressure monitoring sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warn ing limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn ON and a LOW TIRE message will be displayed for a minimum of five seconds An Inflate to XX message will also be displayed After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 360 STARTING AND OPERATING Ses 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will monitor tire pressure levels Sensors mounted to each sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then readings to the Receiver Module E NOTE It is particularly important for you to check the 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and tire pressure in all of the tires on
351. s not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Without The Ignition Key Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK OFF position Flatbed towing is the preferred towing method However if a flatbed towing vehicle is not available wheel lift towing equipment may be used Rear towing with the front wheels on the ground is not allowed as transmission damage will occur If rear towing is the only alternative the front wheels must be placed on a towing dolly Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle CAUTION Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require ments can cause severe transmission damage Dam age from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 24L 419 ll ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 6L 420 ll ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II 421 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 421 E EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS 12x uy eux ce x che d 422 W REPLACEMENT PARIS acm e Son 423 B DEALER SERVICE x3 EY V3 het 423 E MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 424 Engine OI su ier tcd e pe n 425 Engine Oil Filter 1 isses ns 428 Engine Air Cleaner Filter sius 428 Maintenance Free Battery 429 Air Condition
352. s between U S and METRIC System Status Displays SYSTEM OK if there are no active Warning Messages stored Pressing and releasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM OK is displayed will do nothing Displays SYSTEM WARNINGS PRESENT if there are active Warning Messages stored Pressing and releasing the DOWN button when SYSTEM WARNINGS PRES ENT is displayed will display each stored warning for each button press Press and Release the MENU button to return to the Main Menu Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall features when the automatic transaxle is in PARK 234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC Press and release the DOWN button to display the following programmable features Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects English Spanish French German Italian or Dutch de pending on availability As you continue the displayed information will be shown in the selected language Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected and the transaxle is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position all doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened To make your selection press the SELECT button until ON or OFF appears RKE Unlock When Driver
353. s from the vehicle to wash them Dry with a soft cloth Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly 456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE Sx Cleaning Center Console Cupholders FUSES Removal WARNING Grab the rubber portion of the cupholder and lift up s When replacing a blown fuse always use an appro priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as Cleaning the original fuse Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating Never replace a blown fuse soak the supper opholder lmer th a mudre di merinin with metal wires or any other material Failure to use hot tap water and one teaspoon of mild liquid dish soap Let soak for approximately one hour After one hour pull the liner from the water and dip it back into the water about six times This will loosen any remaining debris Rinse the liner thoroughly under warm running water Shake the excess water from the liner and dry the outer surfaces with a clean soft cloth proper fuses may result in serious personal injury fire and or property damage e Before replacing a fuse make sure that the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and or disengaged e If the replaced fuse blows again contact an autho rized dealer Installation Continued Align the liner in the cupholder and press down firmly MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457 WARNING Continued e If a general protection
354. s the driver in maintaining vehicle control under adverse braking conditions The system controls hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock up and help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking WARNING The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those re sulting from excessive speed in turns driving on Continued 326 STARTING AND OPERATING Se WARNING Continued very slippery surfaces or hydroplaning The capa bilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others Traction Control System TCS This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of the driven wheels If wheel spin is detected brake pressure is applied to the slipping wheel s and engine power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability A feature of the TCS system functions similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in the Partial Off mode Refer to Elect
355. scroll through sub menus i e Temperature Trip Func shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last tions Odometer Trip A Trip B teset 224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Sg The EVIC consists of the following ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster E 14 F FM 101 1 10 041036947 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Compass Heading Display N S E W NE NW SE SW Mileage Avg MPG Miles To Empty Low Tire Information Tire Pressure Monitor System TPMS Displays if equipped Timer Units System Warnings Door Ajar etc Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features Outside Temperature Display F or C Audio Mode Displays 12 preset Radio Stations or CD Title and Track number when playing UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225 The system allows the driver to select information by MENU Button pressing the following buttons on the instrument panel switch bank located below the climate controls MENU Press and release the MENU button to advance the display to each of the EVIC Main Menu features Upon reaching the last item in the Main Menu the EVIC will advance to the first item in the Main Menu with the next MENU button press and release m DOWN Button Press and release the DOWN button to advance V th
356. shing severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur Immediate service is required es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221 WARNING A malfunctioning catalytic converter as referenced above can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating conditions This can cause a fire if you CAUTION Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause severe transmission damage or transmission failure drive slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry plants wood cardboard etc This could result in death or serious injury to the driver occupants or others WARNING If you continue operating the vehicle when the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi nated you could cause the fluid to boil over come in contact with hot engine or exhaust components and cause a fire 27 Transmission Temperature Warning Light If Equipped severe usage such as trailer towing If this light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle Then shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot This may occur with 222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Ss 28 High Beam Indicator _ This light indicates that the headlights are on high beam Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer ing wh
357. sion You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 022636664 Positioning The Lap Belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 WARNING 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed posi e A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of tion If necessary slide the latch plate down the injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the webbing to allow the belt to retract fully strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdo WARNING men Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts low as possible and keep it snug A twisted belt may not protect you properly In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer immedi ately and have it fixed Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing comfortable and not resting on your neck The retrac etc tor will wi
358. sition not the ACC position If your vehicle s battery is discharged refer to Shift Lever Override in this section for instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for towing CAUTION Do not use sling type equipment when towing Damage to the fascia will occur When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach to front or rear suspension components Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing Do not push or tow this vehicle with another vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and trans mission may result The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed If flatbed equipment is not available and the transmission is operable the vehicle may be flat towed with all four wheels on the ground under the following conditions e The transmission must be in NEUTRAL 416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE The towing distance must not exceed 15 mi 24 km The towing speed must not exceed 25 mph 40 km h If the transmission is not operable or the vehicle must be towed faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 mi 24 km it must be towed with the front wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed truck towing dolly or wheel lift equipment with the front wheels raised CAUTION Towing faster than 25 mph 40 km h or farther than 15 mi 24 km with front wheels on the ground can cause severe transmission damage Such damage i
359. sition has been reached e Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could cause a collision and serious injury or death e Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat Reclining The Seatback belts and while the vehicle is parked Serious The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted rearward Push the seatback switch forward or rearward seat belt the seat will move in the direction of the switch Release Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the the switch when the desired position is reached shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt which could result in serious injury or death 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CAUTION Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat controls Seat travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat s path Heated Seats If Equipped There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently The controls for each heater are located on the center of the instrument panel above the climate controls You can choose from HIGH LOW or OFF heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat i
360. so can lead to brake failure and a collision ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS The Anti Lock Brake System ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions The system operates with a separate CAUTION If the Brake Warning Light remains on with the parking brake released a brake system malfunction is indicated Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Continued STARTING AND OPERATING 323 computer to modulate the hydraulic pressure to prevent WARNING Continued e The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must wheel lock up and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces WARNING e Pumping of the anti lock brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to a collision Pumping makes the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to The Anti Lock Brake Warning Light moni slow down or stop f3 tors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will e The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys come on when the ignition switch is turned to ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase the ON position and may stay on for as long as braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded four seconds by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded e The ABS cannot prevent collisions including those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or
361. sore ahh E eor ack Ee e anes 386 Trailer Towing Guide lille 380 Trailer Weight xac sce epa esp RO Re ncn 380 Transaxle Atoma 27 d Sede ocd RBH E Ges oa EAR arate Reds ease 12 PULOSHEK sings 2 28 So Sahn oo Goh dentur Perinde Rabe amp 1s 314 Transmission 0 0 eee 446 AUTOMATIC o esu Ge so Y Race ee otis RA Re P RERO 295 Transmitter Battery Service Remote Keyless Entry 26 Transporting Pets sust errotatik 94 Tread Wear Indicators n anaana aaa 350 Trip Computers osea ed ecd EAR WS 222 Trip Odometer rs rag emp 212 Trip Odometer Reset Button 0 0 215 Trunk Lid Deck Lid 00205 40 Trunk Release Emergency llle 41 Trunk Release Remote Control 40 Turm Signalsu amp se ae x ee Pale ees Gon de 165 UCT Connect etiese doti ane 22333 39 263 Uconnect Advanced Phone Connectivity 127 Operations 65 dow asa ences ear Be S Rope a 112 Phone Call Features 000000 ee ae 119 Phone Features 0 000 122 Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect Phone erm e nor gs 129 Uconnect 130 Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode 246 Operating Instructions CD Mode 241 Operating Instructions Radio Mode 237 Playing MP3 Files 0 0 0 eee ee eee 243 Uconnect 130 With Satellite Radio Multimedia Satellite Radio 00 259 Operating Instructions CD Mode 253
362. ssure as required WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 405 Road Tire Installation Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 To ease the installation process for steel wheels with wheel covers install two lug nuts on the mounting studs which are on each side of the valve stem Install the lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING 060503827 mm To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle 1 Valve Stem 4 Wheel Cover has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may 2 Valve Notch 5 Mounting Stud result in personal injury P Whee Lug Mut 406 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 3 Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the valve stem on the wheel Install the cover by hand snapping the cover over the two lug nuts Do not use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts WARNING 5 To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 6 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push do
363. st be pressed Four Speed Automatic Transmission If Equipped The transmission gear position display located in the instrument cluster indicates the transmission gear range You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK refer to Brake Transmission Shift Inter lock System in this section To drive move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position The electronically controlled transmission provides a precise shift schedule The transmission electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few hundred miles kilometers Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears ee STARTING AND OPERATING 299 Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range NOTE After selecting any gear range wait a moment to allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating This is especially important when the engine is cold PARK P This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range When parking on a level
364. st the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a non abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel Ignition Off Operation For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either front door will cancel this feature ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS There are two 12 Volt 13 Amp electrical power outlets on this vehicle Both of the power outlets are protected by a fuse UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191 The instrument panel power outlet located below the A second power outlet is located inside the center con climate control knobs has power available only when the sole ignition is ON This power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit E x 034637632 zn Center Console Power Outlet The center console power outlet is powered directly from Instrument Panel Power Outlet the battery power available at all times Items plugged NOTE To preserve the heating element do not hold the into this power outlet may discharge the battery and or ligh
365. stem Rear Doors To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors of your vehicle have a Child Protection Door Lock system THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 041032963 021836674 Child Protection Door Lock Location Child Lock Control The Child Protection Door Locks are located inside the rear edge of the door Insert the tip of the ignition key or similar flat bladed object into the lock and rotate clock Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision wise approximately one quarter turn to the lock position Remember that the rear doors can only be opened or counter clockwise to the unlock position as indicated from the outside when the Child Protection locks are by the stamped icons engaged 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged pull the lock knob up UNLOCKED position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS Power Window Switches The control on the driver s door has up down switches that give you fingertip control of all four power win dows 021936671 AUTO Power Window Switch There is a single window control on the front and rear passenger s door trim panel which operates the front and rear passenger door windows The window controls will operate when the ignition switch is turned to the ON RUN or ACC position and when the accessory del
366. stem make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards You should also make sure that you can install it in the vehicle where you will use it NOTE For additional information refer to www seatcheck org or call 1 866 SEATCHECK Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada s website for additional infor mation e http www tc gc ca eng roadsafety safedrivers childsafety index 53 htm ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75 Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles Child Size Height Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Infants and Tod Children who are two years old or Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible who have out grown the height or weight limit of their rear facing child restraint dlers younger and who have not reached the Child Restraint facing rearward in the rear height or weight limits of their child re seat of the vehicle straint Small Children Children who are at least two years old or Forward Facing Child Restraint with a five point Harness facing forward in the rear seat of the vehicle Larger Children Children who have out grown their forward facing child restraint but are too small to properly fit the vehicle s seat belt Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve hicle seat belt seated in the rear seat of the vehicle Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children
367. ster is inoperable Floor Mat Safety Information Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your vehicle Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways WARNING Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per sonal injury e Always make sure that floor mats are properly attached to the floor mat fasteners Continued 98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE es WARNING Continued WARNING Continued e Never place or install floor mats or other floor e Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly driver footwell while the vehicle is moving Ob secured to prevent them from moving and interfer jects can become trapped under the brake pedal ing with the pedals or the ability to control the and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle vehicle control e Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top If required mounting posts must be properly in of already installed floor mats Additional floor stalled if not equipped from the factory mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or pedal area and interfere with the pedals mounting can cause interference with the
368. straint Controller ORC determines whether the severity or type of rear impact will require the Active Head Restraints AHR to deploy If a rear impact requires deployment both the driver and front passenger seat AHRs will be deployed When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts NOTE The Active Head Restraints AHR may or may not deploy in the event of a front or side impact However if during a front impact a secondary rear impact occurs the AHR may deploy based on the sever ity and type of the impact AU 7 Q Active Head Restraint AHR Components 022607508 1 Head Restraint Front Half Soft Foam and Trim 2 Seatback 3 Head Restraint Back Half Decorative Plastic Rear Cover 4 Head Restraint Guide Tubes en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 CAUTION 1 Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat All occupants including the driver should not oper ate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle s seat until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a collision NOTE For more information on properly adjusting and positioning the he
369. system will trap the key in the ignition switch lock cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service 020205845 For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Ignition Switch Positions Information Center EVIC the power window 1 LOCK 3 ON RUN switches radio hands free system if equipped and 2 ACC ACCESSORY 4 START power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position Opening either door will cancel this feature 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ME WARNING Continued For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC the power window switches radio hands free system if equipped and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi tion Opening either front door will cancel this feature The time for this feature is programmable Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in Understanding Your Instrument Panel for further information WARNING Before exiting a vehicle always apply the parking brake shift the transmission into PARK and re move the Key Fob from the ignition When leaving the vehicle always lock your vehicle Continued e Neve
370. t into the desired gear range If the problem is no longer detected the transmission will return to normal operation ee STARTING AND OPERATING 305 NOTE Even if the transmission can be reset we recom mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur If the transmission cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required Overdrive Operation The automatic transmission includes an electronically controlled Overdrive fourth gear The transmission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con ditions are present e The shift lever is in the DRIVE position e The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem perature The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera ture e Vehicle speed is sufficiently high e The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator Torque Converter Clutch A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle A clutch within the torque converter engages automati cally at calibrated speeds This may result in a slightly different feeling or response during normal operation in the upper gears When the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations the clutch automatically disengages 306 STARTING AND OPERATING Se NOTE The torque converter clutch will not engage until the transmission f
371. tab and pull upward on the cover ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be injured by moving fan blades e Remove any metal jewelry such as rings watch bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent electrical contact You could be seriously injured e Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive Keep open flames or sparks away from the battery 1 Set the parking brake shift the automatic transmission into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK Locking Tab 2 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electri cal accessories 410 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES Sg 4 If using another vehicle to jump start the battery park the vehicle within the jumper cables reach set the oe parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF Failure to follow these procedures could result in WARNING Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this Connecting The Jumper Cables could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle 1 Connect the positive end of the jumper cable to the remote positive post of the discharged vehicle Jump Starting Procedure 2 Connect the opposite end of the positive jumper WARNING cable to the positive post of the booster battery 3 Connect the negative
372. te apie anis 438 Exhaust Gas Caution 0 0 00000 eee 95 Fails to Start cose ca e ee ye 293 Flooded Starting Fuel Requirements occ 0044224 ss 4a xem n 364 Jump Sarn 44s quss dr cone denies eer 407 OW pista nee taggdd dbase ree tienenas 425 Oil Change Interval s esee y RR Ren 214 Oil Piller Cap ated eee e PR ed od 419 Oil Sel eti n a unc muere ERU S PUR RR dead 426 Oil Synthetic 9244 64 46 eiae Un Rhe ed 428 Overheating a cs s Fer p RP UE Ra 392 Starting sse a es UE ele eate GE Ie ed us 291 Temperature Gauge llle 208 Engine Oil Viscosity a dst creais eee eee 427 Engine Oil Viscosity Chart llle 427 Enhanced Accident Response Feature 69 Entry System Illuminated 21 Ethanol a ss eh Pen te Red hb E 365 Event Data Recorder llle 72 Exhaust Gas Caution ss aseina sranani K eia KE 95 Exhaust System x aec anemi eae d te hoe Row Besa 95 en INDEX 499 Exterior Lights i ju zie Er RA 99 Fabrie Cate sc phos x RITRSPRAA GG Fea gs 454 FCC General Information Remote Keyless Entry 27 FCC General Information Sentry Key 18 Filler Location Fuel iens 208 Filters Air Cleaner aired peg toe te x rte eos 428 Air Conditioning 00 02 0000 00 285 Engine Ol etic s soo dept ee e o quce inane Shans ad 428 Engine Oil Disposal 0 428 Flashers sce e Ra Re E RES 392 Hazard Warning odse ris llle 392 T m Signal sy
373. te service is required The light will come on when the ignition switch is first turned on and remain briefly as a bulb check This is normal If the light does not come on during starting have the system checked by an authorized dealer 18 ParklHeadlight ON Indicator If Equipped This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on zb 0 19 Electronic Stability Control ESC OFF Indicator Light If Equipped This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con trol system ESC has been turned off by the driver 20 Turn Signal Indicators G The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior turn signal when using the turn signal lever A chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km with either turn signal on NOTE If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate check for a defective outside light bulb 21 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped ZO This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on 22 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds when the alarm system is arming The light will begin to flash slowly indicating that the system is armed The light will stop flashing when the vehicle is disarmed 23 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light If Equipped This light monitors the ABS This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the ON RUN position and may stay on for
374. tempt to change a tire on the side of the the left rear wheel 060505162 vehicle close to moving traffic pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked 2 Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers 3 Set the parking brake 4 Place the shift lever into PARK automatic transmis sion or REVERSE manual transmission 398 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE Jacking Instructions WARNING Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle e Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised e Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic transmission in PARK a manual transmission in REVERSE e Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change e If working on or near a roadway be extremely c
375. ter in the heating position prevent the engine from starting 034637631 B 192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE NOTE To ensure proper operation a MOPAR knob and element must be used CAUTION Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts 13 Amps at 12 Volts If the 160 Watt 13 Amp power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will need to be replaced Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the 34030717 fuse Improper use of the power outlet can cause Power Outlet Fuse Locations damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty 1 16 Fuse 15 A Blue Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel 2 11 Fuse 15 A Blue Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193 WARNING To avoid serious injury or death Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet Do not touch with wet hands Close the lid when not in use and while driving the vehicle e If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric shock and failure CAUTION Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent the e
376. terlock LL 298 Bulb Replacement secesi taaie arinta dad 463 Bulbs Light s s kr t nen 99 Calibration Compass 0 0 0 0 000 eee ee 230 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 21 Capacities Fluid ss bee nea ieee eid A71 Caps Filler Fuel s ist dee OX Pad ea Ed eia 372 Oil Engine Lise mme Rr Rene 419 Power Steering acus d esent e Selina s 319 Radiator Coolant Pressure 441 Carbon Monoxide Warning 4 95 Car Washes crror testisa wiki Sara Ren Bates 451 4906 INDEX aa Cellular Phone 2 0 ieme aeaa ap eee 110 Certification Label llle 375 Chains T8125 ES da Sh ahd han ene bd 3 353 Changing A Flat Tite ass emn ra 395 Chart Tire SiZing 4402404844 ue Red eR ey re 333 Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 422 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety 95 Checks Salet aa cy deese eese ter dre ed 95 Child Restraints 12x ESGA RR Y Gc 73 Child Safety Locks 34 Cigar Lighter eene eme br saws 194 Clean Air Gasoline llle 364 Cleaning Wheels sascha nc eda ene e v3 aa 452 Climate Control 0 0c eee ee 273 Clock ikea ceases waa hA da Eae ab ae 5 236 Cold Weather Operation 000 293 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 272 Compact Spare Mires oid oec eer kee are a 348 COMPASS vx see ee Ae ee ia 222 Compass Calibration stseenis llle 230 Compass Variance lese 23
377. thdraw any slack in the belt 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push anchorage button to release the anchor age and move it up or down to the position that serves you best 022636665 Adjustable Anchorage As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 you will prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Rear Seat Belts The shoulder belt anchorages of the rear three point belts are nonadjustable for outboard and center rear passen gers on sedans The center belt is mounted to the rear shelf panel and
378. the LEARN or TRAIN ING button On some garage door openers devices there may be a light that blinks when the garage door opener device is in the LEARN TRAIN mode NOTE You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the LEARN button has been pressed 6 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the garage door opener device activates programming is complete NOTE If the garage door opener device does not acti vate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels 182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps T 2 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming A Rolling Code step 2 and follow all remaining steps Programming A Non Rolling Code For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured before 1995 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Place the hand held transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to pro
379. the drivers side B Pillar or the rear of the driver s door The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer Month and year of manufacture Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR front Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR rear e Vehicle Identification Number VIN Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING Because the front wheels steer the vehicle it is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have a collision 376 STARTING AND OPERATING es Overloading The load carrying components axle springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the front and rear GAWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded an
380. the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn the air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 393 NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition e If your air conditioner A C is on turn it off The A C system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning the A C off can help remove this heat e You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the blower control to high This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system WARNING You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot Engine Oil Overheating 2 4L Engine Only If Equipped During sustained high speed driving or trailer tow up long grades on a hot day the engine oil temperature may become too hot If this happens the HOTOIL message flashes in the odometer and the vehicle speed will be reduced to 48 mph 77 km h until the engine oil temperatur
381. the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use Mist Feature Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate NOTE The mist feature does not activate the washer pump therefore no washer fluid will be sprayed on the windshield The wash function must be used in order to spray the windshield with washer fluid 031508789 Mist Control Headlights With Wipers Feature Available With Automatic Headlights Only When this feature is active the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on if the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173 column is placed in the AUTO position In addition the headlights will turn off when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this feature The headlights with wipers feature can be turned on or off through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC if equipped Refer to Electronic Vehicle Infor mation Center EVIC Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in Understanding Your In strument Panel for further information TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downwar
382. then prompt you as to the num ignation wish Il e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be a aon YORUMISIN E ta deleted or edited e The selected number will be dialed List All Names In The Uconnect Phonebook Phone Call Features Press the button to begin The following features can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone if the feature s are available on your 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M mobile service plan For example if your mobile service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the Uconnect Phone Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call No Call Currently In Progress When you receive a call on your mobile phone the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the w button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call Call Currently In Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your mobile phone Press the w button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the market today
383. tion 0 190 Rear Window Defroster sls 200 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows for horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield A Adjusting Rearview Mirror 030407085 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Automatic Dimming Mirror If Equipped This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare from vehicles behind you You can turn the feature on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror A light to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated The sensor to the right of the button does not illuminate NOTE This feature is disabled when the vehicle is moving in reverse 030406002 Automatic Dimming Mirror ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 CAUTION To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning never spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean Power Mirrors The power mirror control is located on the driver s door trim panel 030436998
384. tires with low pressure those flashing in the EVIC graphic to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pres sure value as shown in the Inflate to XX message Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 24 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information STARTING AND OPERATING 361 Check TPMS Warning When a system fault is detected a chime will sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid In addition the EVIC will display a CHECK TPM SYS TEM message for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being received If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat providing the system fault still exists If the system fault no longer exists the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will no longer flash and the CHECK TPM SYSTEM message will no longer display and a pressure value will display in place of the dashes A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the TPM sensors 362 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 2 4
385. to delete all memos e New Memo to record a new memo During the Setu recording you may press the Voice Command P mm VR button to stop recording You proceed by saying To switch to system setup you may say one of the one of the following commands following Save to save the memo Change to setup Continue to continue recording e Switch to system setup Delete to delete the recording Main menu setup e Play Memos to play previously recorded memos Switch to setup During the playback you may press the Voice Com mand amp vRbutton to stop playing memos You pro E ceed by saying one of the following commands Language English In this mode you may say the following commands Repeat to repeat a memo Language French Next to play the next memo Language Spanish 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e Tutorial Voice Training NOTE Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice Command vRbutton first and wait for the beep before speaking the Barge In commands Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect Voice Voice Training feature may be used 1 Press the Voice Command VR button say System Setup and once you are in that menu then say Voice Training This will train your own voice to the system and will improve recognition 2 Repeat t
386. to the desired track in that list Not all iPod or external USB device sub menu levels are available on this system MUSIC TYPE button The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to the genre listing on your audio device CAUTION Leaving the iPod or external USB device or any supported device anywhere in the vehicle in ex treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam age the device Follow the device manufacturer s guidelines Placing items on the iPod or external USB device or connections to the iPod or external USB device in the vehicle can cause damage to the device and or to the connectors WARNING Do not plug in or remove the iPod or external USB device while driving Failure to follow this warning could result in an accident ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269 Bluetooth Streaming Audio BTSA Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the Uconnect phone system Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons To enter BISA mode press either AUX button on the radio or press the VR button and say Bluetooth Stream ing Audio Play Mode When switched to BISA mode some audio devices can start playing music over the vehicle s audio system but some devices require the music to be initiated on the device first then it will get streamed to the Uconnect phone system Seven devices can be paired to the Uconnect phone system but just one can be selected and p
387. ton is pressed To program the two remaining HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels If you unplugged the garage door opener device for programming plug it back in at this time Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Cycle the ignition to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Canadian Gate Operator Programming step 2 and follow all remaining steps Using HomeLink To operate press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the programmed device i e garage door opener gate opera tor security system entry door lock home office light ing etc The hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink
388. trac As the air bags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the non toxic gas used for air bag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im mediately Also have the Occupant Restraint Con troller System serviced as well ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Maintaining Your Air Bag System WARNING Modifications to any part of the air bag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the air bag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards e It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air bag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system Continued WARNING Continued Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag system The air bag may inflate accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any air bag system service If your seat includi
389. tracks on the audio device e In List mode the radio PRESET buttons are used as e TUNE control knob The TUNE control knob functions shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod or exter in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio nal USB device m device or external USB device Preset 1 Playlists e Turning it clockwise forward and counterclockwise backward scrolls through the lists displaying the track detail on the radio display Once the track to be played is highlighted on the radio display press the TUNE control knob to select and start playing the track Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll through the list faster During fast scroll a slight delay in updating the information on the radio display may be noticeable Preset 2 Artists Preset 3 Albums Preset 4 Genres Preset 5 Audiobooks Preset 6 Podcasts 268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME e e Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list on the top line and the first item in that list on the second line To exit List mode without selecting a track press the same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode LIST button The LIST button will display the top level menu of the iPod or external USB device Turn the TUNE control knob to list the top menu item to be selected and press the TUNE control knob This will display the next sub menu list item on the audio device then follow the same steps to go
390. traint The head restraint will be split by restricting head movement in the event of a rear in two halves with the front half being soft foam and impact Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top trim the back half being decorative plastic of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear Lumbar Support Lever Head Restraints When AHRs deploy during a rear impact the front half of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155 between the back of the occupant s head and the AHR This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in certain types of rear impacts Refer to Occupant Re straints in Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve hicle for further information To raise the head restraint pull upward on the head restraint To lower the head restraint press the push button located at the base of the head restraint and push downward on the head restraint Push Button 030907490 156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted for ward and rearward To tilt the head restraint closer to the back of your head pull forward on the bottom of the head restraint Push rearward on the bottom of the head restraint to move the head restraint away from your head uu 030907533 Active Head Restraint Tilted NOTE
391. ts cama tee ok ec CRI dors 150 Heatetz eua e ei ee RE Se ER a 273 Hitches Trailer TOWING ike qure RC PH CR eta 379 Hood Prop isse ike Ee emeei ART REREG 161 Hood Release llle ees 160 Igt tiOnis iis urat bre BTR dnb ERIT e dre Tg 12 Key caa acie 9 d E EURO E RE Rer Rose Pu 12 Ignition Key Removal llle sess 12 Illuminated Entry 2 2 0 2 eee eee 21 Immobilizer Sentry Key 004 15 Infant Restraint 0 0 0 ee 73 Information Center Vehicle 0 224 Inside Rearview Mirror llle 105 Instrument Cluster llle 207 Instrument Panel and Controls 206 Instrument Panel Cover 000000 454 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 455 Integrated Power Module Fuses 457 Interior Appearance Care 502 INDEX eee Interior Lights iore tars eR rs 168 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers 170 Introduction 224400359444 bees eb edie 4 iPod USB MP3 Control Bluetooth Streaming Audio 144 Jacking Instructions 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 00 000005 398 Jack Location illl 396 Jack Operations secre Rem ERR 395 Jump Staring ico ac ore e e ERR Rd ad 407 Key In Reminder llli 15 Keyless Entry System llle 22 Keyless Entry System Sedan 22 Key Programming 0 6 0 17 Key Replacement llle 16 KEYS co ioi eene d HU deg a qued aca ers 12 Key Sentry
392. turn the seatback to its normal cause you to lose control The seat belt might not be position properly adjusted and you could be injured Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked e Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked Lumbar Support If Equipped This feature allows you to increase or decrease the amount of lumbar support The control lever is located on the outboard side of the driver s seatback Turn the control lever downward to increase and upward to decrease the desired amount of lumbar support Recline Lever 154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE WARNING The head restraints for all occupants must be prop erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu pying a seat Head restraints should never be ad justed while the vehicle is in motion Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision E Active Head Restraints Front Seats 030933269 Active Head Restraints are passive deployable compo nents and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily identified by any markings only through visual inspec Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury tion of the head res
393. um inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres Vehicle manufacturer s recommended cold tire inflation pressure sure as shown on the tire placard Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle s loading capacity the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures STARTING AND OPERATING 337 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Location NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar or the rear edge of the driver s side door 055001823 B Pillar Location For Tire And Loading Information Placard 338 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire And Loading Information Placard SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 FRONT 2 REAR 3 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF qu anos AE SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX KG QR TIRE FRONT SPARE ORIGINAL TIRE SIZE P395 0R14 P195 70R14 1125 70D15 COLD TIRE SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4N109268 811b5a9a Tire And Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 Total weight your vehicle can carry 3 Tire size designed for your vehicle 4 Cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear
394. up During cold temperatures transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission 312 STARTING AND OPERATING Se temperature as well as vehicle speed This feature im proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to achieve maximum efficiency Engagement of the torque converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm refer to the Note under Torque Converter Clutch in this section During extremely cold tempera tures 16 F 27 C or below operation may briefly be limited to third gear only Normal operation will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level Transmission Limp Home Mode Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could result in transmission damage Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated In this mode the transmission remains in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will continue to oper ate The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL may be illu minated Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam aging the transmission In the event of a momentary problem the transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps Stop the vehicle Shift the transmission into PARK Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position 1 2 3 4 Wait app
395. ur vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for mainte nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are 424 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems may void your warranty and could result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perf
396. ur vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine NOTE If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 2 As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 423 3 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement you may need to do nothing more than drive yo
397. ure 4 For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC 15 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control System is ON 16 OdometerlIrip Odometer Reset Button Trip Odometer Press and release this button to change the display from odometer to Trip A Press and release it a second time to change the display to Trip B Press and release it a third time to change the display back to the odometer To reset the trip odometer first display the trip mileage that you want to reset Trip A or Trip B Then push and hold the button approximately two seconds until the display resets to 0 miles km The odometer must be in Trip Mode to reset the trip odometer 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 17 Electronic Throttle Control ETC Indicator Light y This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control ETC system If a problem is detected the light will come on while the engine is running If the light remains lit with the engine running your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing however see your autho rized dealer for service as soon as possible If the light is flashing when the engine is running you may experience power loss an elevated rough idle and increased brake pedal effort and your vehicle may require towing Immedia
398. ure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should always wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front Air Bags room to inflate 4 Do not lean against the door or window If your vehicle has side air bags and deployment occurs the side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 5 If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Need Assistance WARNING e Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The air bags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the air bags won t deploy at all AIways wear your seat belts even though you have air bags Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment could cause serious injury including death Air bags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Continued WARNING Continued e Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain SABIC and Seat Mounted Side Air Bags SAB also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door or window Sit upright in the center of the seat e In a
399. usic type By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type function is active the radio will be tuned to the next channel with the same selected Music Type name If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type Program Type mode the Music Type mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel SETUP Button Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the following items e Display Sirius ID number Press the AUDIO SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number This number is used to activate deactivate or change the Sirius subscription SET Button To Set The Pushbutton Memory When you are receiving a channel that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this channel and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the channel will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263 You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 This allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into pushbutton memory The channels stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutto
400. ustomer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 247 9753 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 English 800 387 9983 French es F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 487 In Mexico Contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D F In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require assistance can use the special needs relay service offered by Bell Canada For TTY teletypewriter users dial 711 and for Voice callers dial 1 800 855 0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s service contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive
401. usty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumulation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains visible sediment have an authorized dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant antifreeze conforming to MS 12106 ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439 Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for the proper CAUTION maintenance intervals Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified Organic Additive Technology OAT en gine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection Organic Additive Technology OAT engine cool ant is different and should not be mixed with NOTE Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant properly Failure to fill these systems properly could lead to severe internal engine damage If any coolant is needed to be added to the system please contact your local authorized dealer Selection Of Coolant Hybrid Organic Additive Technology HOAT en gine coolant antifreeze or any g
402. utomatic Temperature Control Operation Chart that follows for details Automatic Temperature Control Operation Full Automatic Operation Blower Preferred Automatic Mode Preferred Automatic 280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Air Temperature Air Recirculati How Blower Control Mode Control Control Control Set blower knob to Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set blower knob to Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort Automatic User selectable to any speed Automatic Automatic Automatic User selectable to any air delivery point The system will Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic but can be overridden at any time Automatic but can be overridden at any time User selectable outside or recirculated A C Operation Automatic Automatic User selectable AIC on or off Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic Set blower knob to any desired airflow level other than Auto Set mode knob to any desired air delivery point other than Auto Set temperature knobs for comfort User selectable to any speed User selectable to any air delivery point Automatic User selectable outside or recirculated User selectable A C o
403. utside the vehicle press and release the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two times With the ignition switch in the ON RUN position the word dECK will display in place of the odometer display indicating that the trunk is open The odometer display will reappear once the trunk is closed or if the trip button is depressed With the ignition switch in the LOCK position or with the key out the word dECK will display until the trunk is closed On EVIC equipped vehicles the words Trunk Ajar will display ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the trunk either by climbing into the trunk from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended Once in the trunk young children may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the trunk children can die from suffocation or heat stroke Trunk Internal Emergency Release As a security measure a Trunk Internal Emergency Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the trunk the trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow in the dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism Trunk Internal Emergency Release OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems
404. utton e Radio AM to switch to the radio AM mode 2 Say a command e g Help e Radio FM to switch to radio FM mode e Sat to switch to Satellite radio mode e Disc to switch to the disc mode e USB to switch to USB mode ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 e Bluetooth Streaming to switch to Bluetooth Radio FM Streaming mode To switch to the FM band say FM or Radio FM In e Memo to switch to the memo recorder this mode you may say the following commands e System Setup to switch to system setup e Frequency to change the frequency Radio AM e Next Station to select the next station Hm To switch to the AM band say AM or Radio AM In e Previous Station to select the previous station this mode you may say the following commands s Peau Radio to awadu to the radio menu Fequongom Uo shange me eguen Main Menu to switch to the main menu e Next Station to select the next station Satellite Radio Previous Station to select the previous station To switch to satellite radio mode say Sat or Satellite e Radio Menu to switch to the radio menu Radio In this mode you may say the following com mands e Main Menu to switch to the main menu Channel Number to change the channel by its spoken number 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e e e e
405. vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to your autho rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause unde sired operation NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors and trunk for unauthorized entry and ignition switch for unauthor ized operation While the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed interior switches for door locks and decklid release are disabled If something triggers the alarm the Vehicle Security Alarm will signal for about 18 minutes For the first three minutes the horn will sound intermittently the head lights will turn on the park lamps and or turn signals will flash and the Vehicle Security Light in the cluster will flash Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes Rearming The System If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to disarm it the Vehicle Security Alar
406. vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side mirror Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped All exterior mirrors are hinged and may be moved either forward or rearward to resist damage The hinges have three detent positions full forward full rearward and normal An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor To use the mirror lower the sun visor and rotate the mirror cover upward The lights will turn on automatically Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights 110 Illuminated Vanity Mirror Uconnect Phone IF EQUIPPED Uconnect Phone is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system Uconnect Phone al lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se mobile phone s audio is transmitted through your vehi cle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the Uconnect Phone NOTE The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Version 0 96 or higher See the Uconnect website for supported phones For Uconnect customer support e US residents visit www UconnectPhone com or call 1 877 855 8400 e Canadian Residents visit www UconnectPhone com
407. w feet meters away from you e Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a Voice Command period e Performance is maximized under e Low to medium blower setting ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 e Low to medium vehicle speed e Phonebook Downloaded and Uconnect Phone Lo cal name recognition rate is optimized when the e Low road noise n entries are not similar P pe Oan sanane e Numbers must be spoken in single digits 800 must e Fully closed windows be spoken eight zero zero not eight hundred E Dry weather condition You can say O letter O for 0 zero e Even though the system is designed for users speaking e Even though international dialing for most number in North American English French and Spanish ac combinations is supported some shortcut dialing cents the system may not always work for some number combinations may not be supported e When navigating through an automated system such e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of compromised with the convertible top down speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Far End Audio Performance e Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is 4 udio quality is maximized under not in motion is recommended Low To Medium Blower Setting tis not recommended to store similar sounding names in the Uconnect Phonebook Low
408. wn on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice For the correct lug nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec tion If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel Vehicles Without Wheel Covers 1 Mount the road tire on the axle 2 Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped end of the nut toward the wheel Lightly tighten the lug nuts en WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 407 WARNING To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered Failure to follow this warning may result in personal injury 3 Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise 4 Finish tightening the lug nuts Push down on the wrench while at the end of the handle for increased leverage Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has been tightened twice For the correct lug nut torque refer to Torque Specifications in this sec tion If in doubt about the correct tightness have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service station 5 After 25 miles 40 km check the lug nut to
409. xcess fuel push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it Then turn the ignition switch to the START position and release it as soon as the starter engages The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10 seconds Once this occurs release the accelerator pedal turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again ee STARTING AND OPERATING 295 WARNING Remember to disconnect the engine block heater After Starting The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will decrease as the engine warms up ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater warms the engine and permits quicker starts in cold weather Connect the cord to a standard 110 115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a grounded three wire extension cord The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one hour to have an adequate warning effect on the engine The engine block heater cord is bundled under the hood between the headlight assembly and the Totally Inte grated Power Module Fuse Box on the driver s side of the vehicle cord before driving Damage to the 110 115 Volt electrical cord could cause electrocution AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CAUTION Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow ing precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only
410. y 164 Lumbar Support If Equipped 153 Lights On Reminder sess 164 Head Restraints ics remm 154 Turn Sienals 4 ied etai neatis 165 Fold Flat Passenger Seatback 158 Lane Change Assist resso diesis as ars 165 Folding Rear Seat c eec scene ena eie 159 High Low Beam Switch 165 Folding Rear Seat Center Armrest 160 Flash TOPas S cedentes 166 ll TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 160 Fog Lights If Equipped 166 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped Instrument Panel Dimmer Map Reading Interior Lights Battery Saver Feature ill WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Intermittent Wiper System Windshield Washers Mist Feature 0 0 0 Headlights With Wipers Feature Available With Automatic Headlights Only Bl TILT TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN ll ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED TOACHVatC lt lt 244 2 aie eS ah e ae ES he ae 175 To Set A Desired Speed 0 175 To Deactivate 0 0 ce ee 176 To Resume Speed To Vary The Speed Setting To Accelerate For Passing 177 GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED 178 Before You Begin Programming HomeLink 179 Programming A Rolling Code
411. y should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation of your tire The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original equipment tire sidewall See the Tire Sizing Chart ex ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for more information relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two rear tires as a pair Replacing just one tire can seriously affect your vehicle s handling If you ever replace a wheel make sure that the wheel s specifications match those of the original wheels It is recommended you contact your authorized tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 353 WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control WARNING Do not use a tire wheel size or rating oth
412. y the parking brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 311 WARNING Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the ignition to coast down a hill These are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions You might lose control of the vehicle and have a collision CAUTION Towing the vehicle coasting or driving for any other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission damage Refer to Recreational Towing in Starting And Operating and Towing A Disabled Vehicle in What To Do In Emergencies for further information DRIVE D This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides the smoothest upshifts and down shifts and the best fuel economy The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris tics under all normal operating conditions When frequent transmission shifting occurs such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi tions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head winds or while towing heavy trailers use the AutoStick shift control refer to AutoStick in this section for further information to select a lower gear Under these condi tions using a lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build
413. ze Engine Coolant 10 11 6 Quarts 11 Liters Year 150 000 Mile Formula or equivalent Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level 472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M FLUIDS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 10 Year 150 000 Mile Formula OAT Organic Additive Technology Engine Oil 2 4L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil 3 6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W 20 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 such as MOPAR Pennzoil and Shell Helix Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR Engine Oil Filter Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm except PZEV ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473 Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Spark Plugs 24L with We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 031 in 0 8 mm PZEV Spark Plugs 3 6L Engine We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs Gap 0 043 in 1 1 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane PZEV Partial Zero Emission Vehicle
414. zene thinner cleaners or anti static sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do notstore the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc it may be damaged e g scratched reflective coat ing removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES Under certain conditions the mobile phone being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the mobile phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during mobile phone operation when not using Uconnect if equipped es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273 CLIMATE CONTROLS The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of The air conditioning and heating system is designed to olsen zeta y Mal ane a knee make you comfortable in all types of weather Blower Control Manual Heating And Air Conditioning Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced through the venti lation system in any mode The blower speed increases as you move the control to the right

2014 Chrysler 200 Sedan Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents